8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
V900R013C00
Hardware Description
Issue
Draft A
Date
2011-01-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
1/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
2/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address:
Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
i
3/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document
Overview
This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users with
a detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.
Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name
Product Version
BSC6900
V900R013C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Installers
l
Site operators
Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.
2 Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.
3 Cabinet
The
cabinet
is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22
cabinet.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
iii
5/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
About This Document
4 Components of the Cabinet
Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box
or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,
independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cabling frame.
5 Subracks
This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.
6 Boards
This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.
7 Cables
This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.
8 LEDs on the Boards
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
9 DIP Switches on Components
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
iv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
6/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
About This Document
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] *
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
v
7/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
About This Document
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
vi
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
8/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.......................................................1-1
2 Physical Structure.......................................................................................................................2-1
3 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Classification of Cabinets................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Components of the Cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................3-8
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet...................................................................................................................3-9
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components.................................................................3-9
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet........................................................3-13
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-19
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR...........................................................................................3-23
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR .........................................................................................3-26
4 Components of the Cabinet.....................................................................................................4-1
4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box..............................................................................................................4-3
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box.......................................................................4-3
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box........................................................................4-4
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box...................................................4-5
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box.......................................4-6
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box...................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box............................................................................4-8
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box.............................................................................4-9
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box.....................................................4-10
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box..........................................4-11
4.3 Air Defence Subrack.....................................................................................................................................4-13
4.4 Rear Cable Trough........................................................................................................................................4-14
4.5 Cabling Frame...............................................................................................................................................4-14
4.6 KVM..............................................................................................................................................................4-15
4.7 LAN Switch...................................................................................................................................................4-16
4.8 GBAM...........................................................................................................................................................4-18
4.8.1 Functions of GBAM.............................................................................................................................4-19
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
vii
9/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Contents
4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)...........................................................................4-19
4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)......................................................................4-22
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)..............................................................................4-25
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack..............................................................................................................................4-28
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack.......................................................................................4-28
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack..................................................................4-29
5 Subracks.......................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Classification of Subracks...............................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Components of the Subrack............................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Fan Box...........................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).........................................................................................5-4
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).........................................................................................5-7
5.4 Slots in the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................5-9
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................5-10
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack........................................................................................................................5-12
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS....................................................................................................................5-12
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS.....................................................................................................................5-14
5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS.....................................................................................................................5-16
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................5-17
6 Boards...........................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 DPUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board......................................................................................................................6-8
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board.........................................................................................6-9
6.2 DPUc Board....................................................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board..............................................................................................................6-10
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board.....................................................................................................................6-10
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board....................................................................................................................6-11
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board.......................................................................................6-12
6.3 DPUd Board..................................................................................................................................................6-12
6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board..............................................................................................................6-13
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board.....................................................................................................................6-13
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board....................................................................................................................6-14
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board.......................................................................................6-15
6.4 DPUf Board...................................................................................................................................................6-16
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board...............................................................................................................6-16
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board......................................................................................................................6-16
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board.....................................................................................................................6-17
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board.......................................................................................6-18
6.5 DPUg Board..................................................................................................................................................6-19
6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board..............................................................................................................6-19
viii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
10/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Contents
6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board.....................................................................................................................6-19
6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board....................................................................................................................6-20
6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board.......................................................................................6-21
6.6 EIUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-22
6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board................................................................................................................6-22
6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-23
6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-23
6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-24
6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board.........................................................................................................6-25
6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board........................................................................................6-27
6.7 FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................................6-28
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...............................................................................................................6-28
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-29
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board.....................................................................................................................6-29
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-30
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board........................................................................................6-31
6.8 FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................................6-32
6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...............................................................................................................6-32
6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-32
6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board.....................................................................................................................6-33
6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-34
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board........................................................................................6-34
6.9 GCUa/GCGa Board.......................................................................................................................................6-35
6.9.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................6-36
6.9.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-36
6.9.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board........................................................................................................6-37
6.9.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-38
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................6-39
6.10 GOUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-39
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUa Board............................................................................................................6-40
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUa Board...................................................................................................................6-40
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board.................................................................................................................6-41
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUa Board...................................................................................................................6-42
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board....................................................................................6-42
6.11 GOUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-44
6.11.1 Functions of the GOUc Board............................................................................................................6-44
6.11.2 Panel of the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-45
6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.................................................................................................................6-46
6.11.4 Ports on the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-46
6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board....................................................................................6-47
6.12 MDMC Board.............................................................................................................................................6-48
6.12.1 Functions of the MDMC Board.........................................................................................................6-49
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
ix
11/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Contents
6.12.2 Panel of the MDMC Board................................................................................................................6-49
6.12.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board...............................................................................................................6-49
6.12.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board......................................................................................................6-50
6.13 OIUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-51
6.13.1 Functions of the OIUa Board.............................................................................................................6-51
6.13.2 Panel of the OIUa Board....................................................................................................................6-52
6.13.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board...................................................................................................................6-52
6.13.4 Ports on the OIUa Board....................................................................................................................6-53
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board......................................................................................6-54
6.14 OMUa/OMUb Board...................................................................................................................................6-55
6.14.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board...............................................................................................6-56
6.14.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board.....................................................................................................6-56
6.14.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board....................................................................................................6-58
6.14.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board.....................................................................................................6-59
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board.......................................................................6-59
6.15 OMUc Board...............................................................................................................................................6-60
6.15.1 Functions of the OMUc Board...........................................................................................................6-61
6.15.2 Panel of the OMUc Board..................................................................................................................6-61
6.15.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board.................................................................................................................6-63
6.15.4 Ports on the OMUc Board..................................................................................................................6-63
6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board...................................................................................6-64
6.16 PAMU Board...............................................................................................................................................6-65
6.16.1 Functions of the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................6-66
6.16.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.................................................................................................................6-66
6.16.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board................................................................................................................6-67
6.16.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................6-67
6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board...................................................................................6-68
6.17 PEUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-68
6.17.1 Functions of the PEUa Board.............................................................................................................6-69
6.17.2 Panel of the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-69
6.17.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................6-70
6.17.4 Ports on the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-71
6.17.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................6-71
6.17.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.....................................................................................6-74
6.18 PFCU Board................................................................................................................................................6-75
6.18.1 Functions of the PFCU Board............................................................................................................6-75
6.18.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.........................................................................................................6-76
6.18.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-77
6.19 PFCB Board................................................................................................................................................6-78
6.19.1 Functions of the PFCB Board............................................................................................................6-78
6.19.2 Pins on the PFCB Board.....................................................................................................................6-78
6.19.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-80
x
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
12/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Contents
6.20 POUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-80
6.20.1 Functions of the POUc Board............................................................................................................6-81
6.20.2 Panel of the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-81
6.20.3 LEDs on the POUc Board..................................................................................................................6-82
6.20.4 Ports on the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-83
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board.....................................................................................6-83
6.21 SCUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-85
6.21.1 Functions of the SCUa Board.............................................................................................................6-86
6.21.2 Panel of the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-86
6.21.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board..................................................................................................................6-87
6.21.4 Ports on the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-88
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board.....................................................................................6-89
6.22 SCUb Board................................................................................................................................................6-89
6.22.1 Functions of the SCUb Board............................................................................................................6-90
6.22.2 Panel of the SCUb Board...................................................................................................................6-90
6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board..................................................................................................................6-91
6.22.4 Ports on the SCUb Board...................................................................................................................6-92
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board.....................................................................................6-93
6.23 TNUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-93
6.23.1 Functions of the TNUa Board............................................................................................................6-94
6.23.2 Panel of the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-94
6.23.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board..................................................................................................................6-95
6.23.4 Ports on the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-96
6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board.....................................................................................6-96
6.24 XPUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-97
6.24.1 Functions of the XPUa Board............................................................................................................6-97
6.24.2 Panel of the XPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-98
6.24.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board..................................................................................................................6-99
6.24.4 Ports on the XPUa Board.................................................................................................................6-100
6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board...................................................................................6-100
6.25 XPUb Board..............................................................................................................................................6-101
6.25.1 Functions of the XPUb Board..........................................................................................................6-102
6.25.2 Panel of the XPUb Board.................................................................................................................6-103
6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board................................................................................................................6-103
6.25.4 Ports on the XPUb Board.................................................................................................................6-104
6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board...................................................................................6-104
6.26 WOPB Board.............................................................................................................................................6-105
6.26.1 Functions of the WOPB Board.........................................................................................................6-105
7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Power Cables...................................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2 PGND Cables..................................................................................................................................................7-7
7.3 Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................................7-9
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
xi
13/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Contents
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable...................................................................................................................................7-10
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.........................................................................................................7-12
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable.........................................................................................................................7-16
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable...............................................................................................7-18
7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable..........................................................................................................................................7-21
7.9 BITS Clock Cable.........................................................................................................................................7-23
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable................................................................................................................................7-25
7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-27
7.12 Straight-Through Cable...............................................................................................................................7-27
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................7-30
7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-31
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box..........................................................................7-32
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable.................................................................................................................7-34
7.17 OMU serial port cable.................................................................................................................................7-35
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable...........................................................................................................7-36
7.19 SFP+ High-Speed Cable..............................................................................................................................7-37
8 LEDs on the Boards....................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board...............................................................................................................................8-3
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board...............................................................................................................................8-3
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board...............................................................................................................................8-4
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board................................................................................................................................8-4
8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board...............................................................................................................................8-5
8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board................................................................................................................................8-5
8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board................................................................................................................................8-6
8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board................................................................................................................................8-7
8.9 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................................8-8
8.10 LEDs on the GOUa Board............................................................................................................................8-8
8.11 LEDs on the GOUc Board............................................................................................................................8-9
8.12 LEDs on the MDMC Board........................................................................................................................8-10
8.13 LEDs on the OIUa Board............................................................................................................................8-10
8.14 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board.............................................................................................................8-11
8.15 LEDs on the OMUc Board..........................................................................................................................8-12
8.16 LEDs on the PAMU Board.........................................................................................................................8-13
8.17 LEDs on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................8-13
8.18 LEDs on the POUc Board...........................................................................................................................8-14
8.19 LEDs on the SCUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-15
8.20 LEDs on the SCUb Board...........................................................................................................................8-15
8.21 LEDs on the TNUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-16
8.22 LEDs on the XPUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-17
8.23 LEDs on the XPUb Board...........................................................................................................................8-18
9 DIP Switches on Components.................................................................................................9-1
9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.............................................................................................................................9-2
xii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
14/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Contents
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board....................................................................................................................9-4
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board...................................................................................................................9-6
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................9-7
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................9-7
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board....................................................................................................................9-10
9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board................................................................................................................................9-12
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
xiii
15/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
16/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Figures
Figures
Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure...............................................................................................................2-1
Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet...........................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR............................................3-5
Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)....................................................................3-7
Figure 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-6 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with the high-power power
distribution box) .................................................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T).......3-16
Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP
CC3310)..............................................................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs .........3-20
Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs................................3-24
Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR......................................................................................3-27
Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box.......................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)..............................................4-5
Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR..................................................4-7
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box...........................................................................4-8
Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box..........................................................................4-10
Figure 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/
EPR/TCR.............................................................................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM)
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack..........................................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough..............................................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-10 Cabling frame.................................................................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-11 KVM...............................................................................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM.................................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM..................................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-14 LAN switch.....................................................................................................................................4-17
Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch.......................................................................................................4-17
Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch........................................................................................................4-18
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
xv
17/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Figures
Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)...................................................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).....................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM................................................................................................................4-21
Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).............................................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...............................................................................4-23
Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)................................................................................ 4-24
Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310).....................................................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)........................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).........................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack.....................................................................................4-29
Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack......................................................................................4-29
Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board).......................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board).......................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode...............................................5-13
Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode..............................................5-13
Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode............................................................5-14
Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode................................................5-15
Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode............................................. 5-15
Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode...........................................................5-16
Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)..........................................................................................................5-16
Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)..........................................................................................................5-17
Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board....................................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board..................................................................................................................6-11
Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board...................................................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-5 Panel of the DPUg board..................................................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-6 Panel of the EIUa board....................................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-7 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board................................................................................6-25
Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-29
Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-33
Figure 6-10 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.................................................................................................... 6-37
Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-41
Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-45
Figure 6-13 Panel of the MDMC board............................................................................................................. 6-49
Figure 6-14 DIP switch on the MDMC board....................................................................................................6-50
Figure 6-15 Panel of the OIUa board.................................................................................................................6-52
Figure 6-16 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.................................................................................................. 6-57
Figure 6-17 Panel of the OMUc board...............................................................................................................6-62
Figure 6-18 Panel of the PAMU board.............................................................................................................. 6-66
xvi
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
18/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Figures
Figure 6-19 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..............................................................................6-67
Figure 6-20 Panel of the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-70
Figure 6-21 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.............................................................................6-72
Figure 6-22 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-76
Figure 6-23 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-77
Figure 6-24 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-79
Figure 6-25 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-79
Figure 6-26 Panel of the POUc board................................................................................................................6-82
Figure 6-27 Panel of the SCUa board................................................................................................................6-87
Figure 6-28 Panel of the SCUb board................................................................................................................6-91
Figure 6-29 Panel of the TNUa board................................................................................................................6-95
Figure 6-30 Panel of the XPUa board................................................................................................................6-99
Figure 6-31 Panel of the XPUb board..............................................................................................................6-103
Figure 7-1 External power cable..........................................................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks.......................................................................................................7-6
Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack........................................................................7-6
Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable.............................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack....................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables............................................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable.........................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable........................................................................................................................7-11
Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable..............................................................................................7-13
Figure 7-10 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables ...............................................7-16
Figure 7-11 120-ohm twisted pair cable.............................................................................................................7-16
Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable...................................................................................7-18
Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables......................................7-21
Figure 7-14 Inter-TNUa cable............................................................................................................................7-22
Figure 7-15 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables..............................................................................7-23
Figure 7-16 75-ohm coaxial clock cable............................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-17 120-ohm clock conversion cable....................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables....................................................................7-25
Figure 7-19 Y-shaped clock cable......................................................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables........................................................................7-26
Figure 7-21 Line clock signal cable...................................................................................................................7-27
Figure 7-22 Shielded straight-through cable......................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-23 Unshielded straight-through cable..................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the SCUa boards in different
subracks...............................................................................................................................................................7-29
Figure 7-25 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................................7-30
Figure 7-26 Alarm box signal cable...................................................................................................................7-31
Figure 7-27 Connection of the alarm box signal cable.......................................................................................7-32
Figure 7-28 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................................7-33
Figure 7-29 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box......................7-34
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
xvii
19/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Figures
Figure 7-30 GPS signal transmission cable........................................................................................................7-34
Figure 7-31 OMU serial port cable....................................................................................................................7-35
Figure 7-32 RS485 communication cable..........................................................................................................7-36
Figure 7-33 SFP+ high-speed cable...................................................................................................................7-37
Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack...................................................................................9-2
Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board..................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board........................................................................................................9-6
Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................9-11
Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................9-11
Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-12
Figure 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-13
xviii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
20/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900...............................................................................................................2-2
Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations............................................................................3-5
Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations...............................................................................3-7
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).............................................................3-8
Table 3-4 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.........................................3-15
Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T)........ 3-17
Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP
CC3310)..............................................................................................................................................................3-19
Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-21
Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the EPR........................................................................................3-25
Table 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the TCR........................................................................................3-28
Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box....................................................4-4
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)..........................4-5
Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR....................................................4-7
Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box........................................................4-9
Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box...................................................... 4-10
Table 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/
EPR/TCR.............................................................................................................................................................4-12
Table 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM)
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-13
Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch......................................................................................4-18
Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)...................................................4-20
Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).................................................. 4-22
Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...........................................4-23
Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)............................................ 4-25
Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)...................................................4-26
Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).....................................................4-28
Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.................................................................4-30
Table 5-1 Components of the subrack..................................................................................................................5-4
Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)......................................................................5-5
Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)........................................5-6
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
xix
21/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Tables
Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)......................................................................5-8
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)........................................5-9
Table 5-6 Description about the bits...................................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch...................................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack.............................................................................................5-17
Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards.................................................................................................6-1
Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board.....................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board........................................................................................6-9
Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board...................................................................................................................6-11
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board......................................................................................6-12
Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-14
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board......................................................................................6-15
Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board...................................................................................................................6-17
Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board......................................................................................6-18
Table 6-10 LEDs on the DPUg board................................................................................................................6-21
Table 6-11 Technical specifications of the DPUg board....................................................................................6-21
Table 6-12 LEDs on the EIUa board..................................................................................................................6-24
Table 6-13 Ports on the EIUa board...................................................................................................................6-24
Table 6-14 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board........................................................................6-26
Table 6-15 Description of the different DIP switches........................................................................................6-27
Table 6-16 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board.....................................................................................6-27
Table 6-17 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-28
Table 6-18 LEDs on the FG2a board..................................................................................................................6-30
Table 6-19 Ports on the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-30
Table 6-20 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board.....................................................................................6-31
Table 6-21 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-31
Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2c board..................................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-34
Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board.....................................................................................6-35
Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-35
Table 6-26 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.....................................................................................................6-37
Table 6-27 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board......................................................................................................6-38
Table 6-28 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board........................................................................6-39
Table 6-29 LEDs on the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-41
Table 6-30 Ports on the GOUa board.................................................................................................................6-42
Table 6-31 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board...................................................................................6-42
Table 6-32 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-43
Table 6-33 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board....................................................................6-43
Table 6-34 LEDs on the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-46
Table 6-35 Ports on the GOUc board.................................................................................................................6-47
Table 6-36 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board...................................................................................6-47
Table 6-37 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-47
xx
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
22/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
23/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Tables
Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the SCUb board....................................................................................6-93
Table 6-81 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................6-95
Table 6-82 Ports on the TNUa board..................................................................................................................6-96
Table 6-83 Technical specifications of the TNUa board....................................................................................6-96
Table 6-84 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................6-99
Table 6-85 Ports on the XPUa board................................................................................................................6-100
Table 6-86 Technical specifications of the XPUa board..................................................................................6-100
Table 6-87 LEDs on the XPUb board..............................................................................................................6-103
Table 6-88 Ports on the XPUb board................................................................................................................6-104
Table 6-89 Technical specifications of the XPUb board..................................................................................6-105
Table 7-1 External power cables..........................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)......................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)......................................................................................................................7-5
Table 7-4 External power cables..........................................................................................................................7-6
Table 7-5 Internal power cables...........................................................................................................................7-7
Table 7-6 PGND cables........................................................................................................................................7-8
Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables.....................................................................................................................7-10
Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables...............................................7-11
Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable...........................................................................7-12
Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-13
Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable.........................................................................7-14
Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-14
Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable....................................7-17
Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-18
Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-19
Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-20
Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-20
Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable....................................................................................................7-29
Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................7-30
Table 7-20 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-31
Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable....................................................................................................7-32
Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................7-33
Table 7-23 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-33
Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial port cable....................................................................................................7-35
Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable.........................................................................................7-36
Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board.....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board.....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board....................................................................................................................8-4
Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board.....................................................................................................................8-4
Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUg board....................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-6 LEDs on the EIUa board......................................................................................................................8-6
Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2a board......................................................................................................................8-6
xxii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
24/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
Tables
Table 8-8 LEDs on the FG2c board......................................................................................................................8-7
Table 8-9 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.........................................................................................................8-8
Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUa board..................................................................................................................8-8
Table 8-11 LEDs on the GOUc board..................................................................................................................8-9
Table 8-12 LEDs on the MDMC board..............................................................................................................8-10
Table 8-13 LEDs on the OIUa board..................................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-14 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board...................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-15 LEDs on the OMUc board...............................................................................................................8-12
Table 8-16 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................8-13
Table 8-17 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................8-13
Table 8-18 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................8-14
Table 8-19 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................8-15
Table 8-20 LEDs on the SCUb board.................................................................................................................8-16
Table 8-21 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................8-16
Table 8-22 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................8-17
Table 8-23 LEDs on the XPUb board................................................................................................................8-18
Table 9-1 Description about the bits.....................................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch.....................................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board............................................................................9-5
Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches............................................................................................9-6
Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board.........................................................................................................9-6
Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board..........................................................................................................9-7
Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board............................................................................9-9
Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)...............................................9-11
Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack).....................................................9-12
Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)........................................................9-12
Table 9-11 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)..............................................................9-13
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
xxiii
25/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
26/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
1
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description
Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware
Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.
Draft A (2011-01-31)
This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l
6.4 DPUf Board
l
6.5 DPUg Board
l
6.15 OMUc Board
l
6.22 SCUb Board
l
7.19 SFP+ High-Speed Cable
Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue incorporates the following
changes:
Content
Description
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the HighPower Power Distribution Box
The figure of the rear panel of the high-power power
distribution box is modified.
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the
Common Power Distribution
Box
The figure of the rear panel of the common power
distribution box is modified.
7.18 EMU RS485
Communication Cable
The installation of EMU RS485 communication cable is
modified.
6.17.6 Technical Specifications
of the PEUa Board
The A-interface processing specification of the board is
added: CIC (64K).
Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
1-1
27/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
28/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
2 Physical Structure
2
Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.
Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.
Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure
(1) GPS: Global Positioning System
(2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)
(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal
Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
2-1
29/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
2 Physical Structure
Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900
Component
Description
Cabinet
For details, see 3 Cabinet.
Cables
For details, see 7 Cables.
GPS antenna system
The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,
and surge protector.
The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It
is optional.
LMT
The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal
that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal
software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The
LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.
For details, see the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.
2-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
30/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
3
Cabinet
About This Chapter
The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet.
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet
The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet.
3.2 Classification of Cabinets
Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended
processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).
3.3 Components of the Cabinet
When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from
those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of
the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet r efer to cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC).
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet
This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-1
31/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet
The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows the single-door cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door cabinet.
Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet
3-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
32/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet
3.2 Classification of Cabinets
Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended
processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).
MPR
Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.
EPR
The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be
configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.
TCR
The number of TCRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume and the configuration modes
of
subracks.
Up to two TCRs can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to
configure
a TCR.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-3
33/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
For details on the components of the MPR, the EPR, or the TCR, see 3.3 Components of the
Cabinet.
3.3 Components
of the Cabinet
When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from
those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of
the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.
Components of the MPR (Configured with the OMU)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR cabinet is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are the
same as those of the EPR/TCR. The components are the power distribution box, subrack, air
defence subrack, independent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough. Figure 3-3
shows the components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.
3-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
34/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR
(1) Air inlet
(2) Independent fan subrack
(3) Subrack
(4) Air defence subrack
(5) Filler panel
(6) Power distribution box
(7) Cable rack
(8) Rear cable trough
Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.
Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations
Component
Configuration
Power Distribution Box or
Power Distribution Box
One common power distribution box or one high-power
power distribution box is configured.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-5
35/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Component
Configuration
Subrack
l
The MPR is configured with one main processing
subrack (MPS). In addition, depending on the traffic
volume, it is configured with zero to two extended
processing subracks (EPSs) or transcoder subracks
(TCSs).
l
The EPR is configured with one to three EPSs,
depending on the traffic volume.
l
The TCR is configured with one to three TCSs,
depending on the traffic volume.
Air Defence Subrack
Two air defence subracks are configured.
Independent Fan Subrack
Only one independent fan subrack is configured.
Rear Cable Trough
Three rear cable troughs are configured.
NOTE
The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.
Components of the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)
When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, its components are the power distribution box,
subrack, air defence subrack, KVM, LAN switch, cabling frame, GBAM, and rear cable trough.
Figure 3-4 shows the components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM).
3-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
36/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)
(1) GBAM (2) Filler panel
(3) Cabling frame
(4) LAN switch (5) KVM
(6) Subrack (7) Air defence subrack (8) Power distribution box
(9) Cable rack
(10) Rear cable trough
Table 3-2 lists the components of the MPR and describes their configurations.
Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations
Component
Configuration
Power Distribution Box
Only one common power distribution box
is configured.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-7
37/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Component
Configuration
Subrack
The MPR is configured with one MPS. In
addition, depending on the traffic volume,
it is configured with zero to two EPSs or
TCSs.
Air Defence Subrack
Two air defence subracks are configured.
KVM
The KVM is optional. The MPR can be
configured with one KVM.
LAN switch
One LAN switch is configured.
Cabling Frame
One cabling frame is configured.
GBAM
One GBAM is configured.
Rear Cable Trough
Three rear cable troughs are configured.
NOTE
The MPR can use the common power distribution box but not the high-power distribution box when it is
configured with the GBAM.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet refer to cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC).
Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)
3-8
Item
Specification
Dimensions
2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)
Height of the available space
46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)
Weight
l
Empty cabinet ≤ 100 kg
l
Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 320 kg
Rated input voltage
-48 V DC power supply
Input voltage range
-40 V to -57 V
EMC
l
Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386
l
Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
38/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
CAUTION
When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,
multiple boards may become abnormal at the same time. Therefore, check the power system if
multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet
This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components
This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power
distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components
in the cabinet.
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet
The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and independent
fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the ground bar in the equipment
room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR
The signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa
cable, BITS clock cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR
The signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa
cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR
The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa
cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components
This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power
distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components
in the cabinet.
Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box
For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.
Figure 3-5 shows the relation between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is
configured with a high-power power distribution box. Table 3-4 describes the relation between
power
outputs
and the components in the MPR that is configured with a high-power power
distribution
box.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-9
39/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power
distribution box)
Table 3-4 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power
distribution box)
PDF Output
Input of Power
Distribution Box
Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box
Subrack Input
63 A -48 V DC
output 1
A1(-)
A7 NEG
(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on the
independent fan subrack
A8 NEG
(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2
B7 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 2 on the
independent fan subrack
B8 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2
A7 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 1 on the
independent fan subrack
63 A -48 V DC
output 2
63 A RTN power
output 1
3-10
B1(-)
A1(+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
40/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
PDF Output
Input of Power
Distribution Box
63 A RTN power
output 2
100 A -48 V DC
output 1
B1(+)
A3(-)
100 A -48 V DC
output 2
B3(-)
100 A RTN power
output 1
A3(+)
100 A RTN power
output 2
B3(+)
Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box
Subrack Input
A8 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 1 on subrack
2
B7 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 2 on the
independent fan subrack
B8 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 2 on subrack
2
A9 NEG
(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1
A10 NEG
(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0
B9 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1
B10 NEG
(-)
-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0
A9 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 1 on subrack
1
A10 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 1 on subrack
0
B9 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 2 on subrack
1
B10 RTN
(+)
RTN power input 2 on subrack
0
Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box
Figure 3-6 shows the relation between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is
configured with a common power distribution box. Table 3-5 describes the relation between
power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a common power
distribution box.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-11
41/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-6 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power
distribution box)
Table 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power
distribution box)
PDF Output
Input of Power
Distribution Box
Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box
Subrack Input
100 A -48 V DC
output 1
-48V1
I -48V1
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2
II -48V1
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1
III -48V1
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0
I -48V2
-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2
II -48V2
-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1
III -48V2
-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0
RTN
RTN power input 1 on subrack
2
RTN
RTN power input 1 on subrack
1
100 A -48 V DC
output 2
100 A RTN power
output 1
3-12
-48V2
RTN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
42/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
PDF Output
Input of Power
Distribution Box
100 A RTN power
output 2
RTN
Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box
Subrack Input
RTN
RTN power input 1 on subrack
0
RTN
RTN power input 2 on subrack
2
RTN
RTN power input 2 on subrack
1
RTN
RTN power input 2 on subrack
0
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet
The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and independent
fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the ground bar in the equipment
room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the
OMU Board)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the connections of power cables and PGND
cables in the MPR are the same as the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the
EPR/TCR. Figure 3-7 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR
(configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR that is configured with the high-power power
distribution box.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-13
43/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with the
high-power power distribution box)
Table 3-6 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.
3-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
44/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN
Description
5, 6, 11, 12
Power cables for the bottom subrack
3, 4, 9, 10
Power cables for the middle subrack
1, 2, 7, 8
Power cables for the top subrack
13
PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and
the mounting bar
14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting
bar
24, 25, 26
Inter-cabinet PGND cables
27, 28, 29, 30
Power cables for the independent fan subrack
31
PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and
the mounting bar
50-57
PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels
Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the
GBAM)
Figure 3-8 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with GBAM IBM X3650T. Figure 3-9 shows the connections of power cables and
PGND cables in the MPR that is configured with GBAM HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-15
45/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM
X3650T)
Table 3-7 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with IBM X3650T.
3-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
46/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM
X3650T)
SN
Description
1-8
Power cables for subracks
9, 10
Power cables for the LAN switch
11
Power cable for the KVM
12
Monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box
11.1.1, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.2.2
Power cables for the GBAM
13
PGND cable connecting the power
distribution box and the busbar
14, 15, 16, 17
PGND cables for subracks
18, 19
PGND cables connecting the busbars of
different cabinets
20
PGND cable for the KVM
21
PGND cable for the LAN switch
22, 23
PGND cables for the GBAM
24-31
PGND cables for cabinet doors and side
panels
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-17
47/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with
HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)
Table 3-8 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.
3-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
48/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with
HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)
SN
Description
1-8
Power cables for subracks
11
Power cable for the KVM
12
Monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box
11.1.1, 11.2.1
Power cables for the LAN switch
9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3,
11.2.3
Power cables for the GBAM
13
PGND cable connecting the power
distribution box and the busbar
14, 15, 16, 17
PGND cables for subracks
18, 19
PGND cables connecting the busbars of
different cabinets
20
PGND cable for the KVM
21
PGND cable for the LAN switch
22, 23
PGND cables for the GBAM
24-31
PGND cables for cabinet doors and side
panels
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR
The signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa
cable, BITS clock cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-10 shows the connections of the signal cables
for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-19
49/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two
EPSs
NOTE
The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure
3-10 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
Table 3-9 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.
3-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
50/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR
SN
Description
Connector Type
1/Connection
Position 1
Connector Type
2/Connection
Position 2
Remarks
1, 2, 3, 4
75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock
SMB male
connector/CLKIN1
port on the GCUa
board in slot 13 of
the MPS
Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port
75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
SMB male
connector/CLKIN0
port on the GCUa
board in slot 13 of
Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port
Figure 3-10
shows the
clock cables
connected to
the CLKIN1
and CLKIN0
ports. In
practice, only
one port is
used to
connect to the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock
the MPS
75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock
SMB male
connector/CLKIN1
port on the GCUa
board in slot 12 of
the MPS
Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port
75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock
SMB male
connector/CLKIN0
port on the GCUa
board in slot 12 of
the MPS
Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port
5
Y-shaped clock
signal cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
SCUb board
RJ45/CLKOUT0
ports on the GCUa
boards in slots 12
and 13 of the MPS
RJ45/CLKIN port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the EPS
6
Y-shaped clock
signal cable
RJ45/CLKOUT0
ports on the GCUa
RJ45/CLKIN port
on the SCUb board
connecting the
GCUa board to the
SCUb board
boards in slots 12
and 13 of the MPS
in slot 6 of the EPS
7
Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks
DB14/TDM port on
the TNUa board in
slot 4 or 5 of the
MPS
DB14/TDM port
on the TNUa board
in slot 4 or 5 of the
EPS
8
Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks
DB14/TDM port on
the TNUa board in
slot 4 or 5 of the
MPS
DB14/TDM port
on the TNUa board
in slot 4 or 5 of the
EPS
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
BITS clock.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
-
-
3-21
51/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
3-22
SN
Description
Connector Type
1/Connection
Position 1
Connector Type
2/Connection
Position 2
Remarks
9, 10
E1/T1 cables for the
EIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port
on the EIUa board
in slot 14 or 15 of
the MPS
DDF or other NEs
-
11
E1/T1 cable for the
EIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port
on the EIUa board
in slot 14 or 15 of
the EPS
DDF or other NEs
-
12
Monitoring signal
cable for the power
distribution box
DB15/Port
connecting the
power distribution
DB9/MONITOR 1
port on the
independent fan
-
box to the
independent fan
subrack
subrack
13
Optical cable
between the MPS
and the TCS
LC optical port/Slot
27 of the MPS
OIUa board in the
TCS, ODF, or other
NEs
-
14
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the MPS
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 6 of the EPS
-
15
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the MPS
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the EPS
16
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 6 of the MPS
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the EPS
17
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
SCUb boards of
different subracks
in slot 6 of the MPS
in slot 6 of the EPS
18
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the MPS
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 6 of the EPS
19
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 6 of the MPS
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 6 of the EPS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
-
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
52/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
SN
Description
Connector Type
1/Connection
Position 1
Connector Type
2/Connection
Position 2
Remarks
20
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the MPS
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the EPS
-
21
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 6 of the MPS
RJ45/The 10G port
on the SCUb board
in slot 7 of the EPS
-
22
Ethernet cable
between the OMUc
board and the
RJ45/Ethernet port
on the OMUc board
RJ45/Ethernet port
on the M2000 or of
the LAN
ETH port on
the OMUc
board,
M2000/LAN
23
Monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack
connecting to
the M2000 or
the LAN
DB15/MONITOR
0 port on the
independent fan
subrack
DB9/Monitor port
on the rear of the
bottom subrack
The cable is
mandatory
and is
installed
before
delivery.
Only one
monitoring
signal cable
for the
independent
fan subrack is
configured.
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR
The signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm
twisted
pair cable,
opticaland
cable,
straight-through
cable,for
SFP+
high-speed
cable, inter-TNUa
cable,
Y-shaped
clock cable,
monitoring
signal cable
the power
distribution
box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-11 shows the connections of the signal cables
for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-23
53/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs
3-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
54/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
NOTE
The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure
3-11 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
Table 3-10 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.
Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the EPR
SN
Description
Connector Type1/
Connection Position1
Connector Type2/
Connection Position2
1
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
MPS
2
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
MPS
3
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
MPS
4
SFP+ high-speed
RJ45/The 10G port on the
RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
EPS
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
MPS
5
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
MPS
6
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
MPS
7
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
MPS
8
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
MPS
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-25
55/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
SN
Description
Connector Type1/
Connection Position1
Connector Type2/
Connection Position2
9
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
MPS
10
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
MPS
11
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
MPS
12
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
EPS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
MPS
13, 14,
15
E1/T1 cable for the
EIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port on the
EIUa board in slot 14 or 15
of the EPS
DDF or other NEs
16, 17,
18
Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks
DB14/TDM ports on the
TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the EPS
DB14/TDM ports on the
TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the EPS
19
Monitoring signal
cable for the power
distribution box
DB15/Port connecting the
power distribution box to
the independent fan subrack
DB9/MONITOR 1 port on
the independent fan
subrack
20
Monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack
DB15/MONITOR 0 port on
the independent fan subrack
DB9/Monitor port on the
rear of the bottom subrack
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR
The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa
cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-12 shows the connections of the signal cables
for the TCR.
3-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
56/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-27
57/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
NOTE
l
The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure
3-12 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l
Among the multiple TCSs configured in the BSC6900 cabinet, one TCS is responsible for forwarding
the OM signals from other TCSs, and this TCS is referred to as the main TCS. In Figure 3-12, the
lowest TCS serves as the main subrack. In practice, any TCS can serve as the main subrack, and the
SCUb board in the main TCS is connected to the SCUb boards in other TCSs in star topology.
Table 3-11 describes the connections of signal cables for the TCR.
Table 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the TCR
3-28
SN
Description
Connector Type1/
Connection Position1
Connector Type2/
Connection Position2
1
Monitoring signal
cable for the power
distribution box
DB15/Port connecting the
power distribution box to
the independent fan subrack
DB9/MONITOR 1 port on
the independent fan
subrack
2
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
main TCS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
TCS
3
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
main TCS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
TCS
4
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
main TCS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
TCS
5
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
main TCS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
TCS
6
SFP+
high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The
10G
onofthe
SCUb board
in port
slot 7
the
main TCS
RJ45/The
10G
SCUb board
in port
slot 6on
ofthe
the
TCS
7
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
main TCS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
TCS
8
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
main TCS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 6 of the
TCS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
58/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3 Cabinet
SN
Description
Connector Type1/
Connection Position1
Connector Type2/
Connection Position2
9
SFP+ high-speed
cable connecting
SCUb boards of
different subracks
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
main TCS
RJ45/The 10G port on the
SCUb board in slot 7 of the
TCS
10, 11,
12
Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks
DB14/TDM ports on the
TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the TCS
DB14/TDM ports on the
TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the TCS
13, 14,
15
E1/T1 cable for the
EIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port on the
EIUa board in slot 14 or 15
of the TCS
DDF or other NEs
16
Optical cable
LC optical port/The RX/TX
OIUa board of the MPS/
between different
subracks
port on the OIUa board in
slot 27 of the TCS
EPS or ODF
Monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack
DB15/MONITOR 0 port on
the independent fan subrack
DB9/Monitor port on the
rear of the bottom subrack
17
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
3-29
59/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
60/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
4
Components of the Cabinet
About This Chapter
Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box
or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,
independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cabling frame.
4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box
A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box
A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
4.3 Air Defence Subrack
The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
4.4 Rear Cable Trough
The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
4.5 Cabling Frame
The cabling frame provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
4.6 KVM
KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the
GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
4.7 LAN Switch
The LAN switch is configured in the MPR.
4.8 GBAM
The BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.
The GBAM is installed in the MPR.
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-1
61/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.
4-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
62/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box
A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
The high-power power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection
for the four -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.
Each group has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The high-power power distribution
box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and
visual alarms when faults occur.
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel of
the Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to
a subrack, and a 2-hole grounding screw.
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
high-power power distribution box.
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a
fixed relation between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of
the cabinet.
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel of
the Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.
Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box
(1) Panel of the PAMU board
(2) RUN LED
(3) ALM LED
(4) Mute switch
(5) Power switches
(6) Labels for power switches
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-3
63/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
NOTE
l
For details about the PAMU board, see 6.16 PAMU Board.
l
When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the
RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the
power distribution box.
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l
If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when
it is faulty.
l
If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible
alarm when it is faulty.
The front panel of the high-power power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The PAMU board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The PAMU board is not working or it
does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.
OFF
There is no power supply to the PAMU
board or the power distribution box
does not work properly.
OFF
There is no alarm related to the power
distribution box.
ON
The power distribution box is faulty.
During the self-check of the PAMU
ALM
Red
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to
a subrack, and a 2-hole grounding screw.
Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box.
4-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
64/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)
(1) Power input terminal block
(2) Power output terminal
block
(3) Port used to connect the power
distribution box to a subrack
(4) 2-hole grounding screw
(5) J1 port
(6) J2 port (port used to connect the power
distribution box to a EMU)
NOTE
l
Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l
On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
are labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3
(+) and 1(+) respectively.
l
On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power
Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)
Item
Sub-item
Specification
Input
Rated input voltage
-48 V DC or -60 V DC
Input voltage range
-40 V DC to -72 V DC
Input mode
Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A
consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group
B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each
group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
inputs.
Max. input current
The maximum rated input current of each route is
100 A.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-5
65/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Item
Sub-item
Specification
Output
Rated output voltage
-48 V DC or -60 V DC
Output voltage
range
-40 V DC to -72 V DC
Output mode and
current
Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group
has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
outputs. The maximum rated output current of each
output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.
Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 and
B7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surge
protection function.
Output protection
specifications
The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need
to manually switch on the corresponding MCB
after the power surge protection.
Rated output power
9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.
Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)
NOTE
For group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 corresponds
to power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs
B1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power
Distribution Box
The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a
fixed relation between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of
the cabinet.
Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the eight power switches on the power distribution box
and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relation between the eight power
switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.
4-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
66/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR
Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR
Component
Power Switch
Subrack 2
A8, B8
Subrack 1
A9, B9
Subrack 0
A10, B10
Independent fan subrack
A7, B7
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box
A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
The common power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection
for the two -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.
Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs. The common power distribution
box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and
visual alarms when faults occur.
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
The components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of the
Distribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, power
switches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-7
67/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
The components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distribution
box to a subrack.
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
common power distribution box.
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box
There is a fixed relation between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and the
components in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
The components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of the
Distribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, power
switches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).
Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the common power distribution box.
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box
(1) Panel of the MDMC board
(2) RUN LED
(3) ALM LED
(5) Labels for power switches
(6) Power switches
(7) Panel of the WOPB board
(4) Mute switch
NOTE
For details about the MDMC and WOPB boards, see 6.12 MDMC Board and 6.26 WOPB Board.
CAUTION
l
Before operating a power switch, refer to the label for the power switch on the panel of the
common power distribution box.
l
Before removing a component from the cabinet, one must turn off the power switch that
controls power supply to the component and remove the power cable for the component.
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l
If
you when
set theitmute
switch to ON, the common power distribution box generates an audi ble
alarm
is faulty.
4-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
68/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
l
If you set the mute switch to OFF, the common power distribution box does not generate
an audible alarm when it is faulty.
The front panel of the common power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Table 4-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box.
Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The MDMC board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The MDMC is not working or it does not
communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
OFF
There is no power supply to the MDMC
board or the common power distribution
box does not work properly.
OFF
There is no alarm related to the common
power distribution box.
ON
The common power distribution box is
faulty. During the self-check of the
MDMC board, however, the ALM LED
is also on. This indicates that the ALM
ALM
Red
LED is functional.
NOTE
When the common power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the MDMC board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUN
and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the common power
distribution box.
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
The components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distribution
box to a subrack.
Figure 4-5 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-9
69/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box
(1) Power input terminal block
(2) Power output terminal block (3) Port used to connect the power
distribution box to a subrack
(4) COM1 port (port used to connect (5) COM2 port
the power distribution box to a EMU)
NOTE
l
Figure 4-5 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l
The port on the power distribution box is connected to the bottom subrack through the monitoring
signal cable for the power distribution box.
On the power input terminal block and power output terminal block, the wiring terminals for
the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48 V and RTN, respectively.
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution
Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
common power distribution box.
Table 4-5 describes the technical specifications of the common power distribution box.
Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box
4-10
Item
Sub-item
Specification
Input
Rated input voltage
-48 V DC
Input voltage range
-40 V DC to -57 V DC
Input mode
Two -48 V DC inputs
Max. input current
Two power inputs. The
maximum current of each
input is 100 A.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
70/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Item
Sub-item
Specification
Output
Rated output voltage
-48 V DC
Output voltage range
-40 V DC to -57 V DC
Output mode and current
Six groups of independent
power outputs. Each group
has one -48 V DC power
output and one RTN power
output. Each output can be
switched on or off, and is
provided with the power
surge protection function.
When the total current of the
six outputs is smaller than
100 A, the maximum current
of each output is 70 A.
Output protection
specifications
The power surge protection
point is 87.5 A. You need to
manually switch on the
corresponding MCB after
the power surge protection.
Rated output power
Hot backup mode: 4,800 W
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power
Distribution Box
There is a fixed relation between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and the
components in the cabinet.
Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)/
EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on the
common power distribution box in the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switches
on the common power distribution box in the EPR/TCR. Figure 4-6 shows the relation between
the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in the cabinet.
Table 4-6 describes the relation between the six power switches on the common power
distribution box and the components in the cabinet.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-11
71/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the OMU board)/EPR/TCR
Table 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the OMU board)/EPR/TCR
Component
Power Switch
Subrack 2
SW1, SW4
Subrack 1
SW2, SW5
Subrack 0
SW3, SW6
Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)
Figure 4-7 shows the relation between the six power switches on the common power distribution
box and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM. Table 4-7 describes
the relation between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the
components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
4-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
72/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the GBAM)
Table 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the GBAM)
Component
Power Switch
Subrack 1
SW1, SW4
Subrack 0
SW2, SW5
KVM
SW3
LAN switch
SW3
GBAM
SW3, SW6
4.3 Air Defence Subrack
The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
Physical appearance
Figure 4-8 shows the air defence subrack.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-13
73/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack
Dimensions
The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm
(depth).
4.4 Rear Cable Trough
The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
Figure 4-9 shows the rear cable trough.
Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough
4.5 Cabling Frame
The cabling frame provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
Figure 4-10 shows the cabling frame.
4-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
74/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-10 Cabling frame
4.6 KVM
KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the
GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
Appearance
Figure 4-11 shows the KVM.
Figure 4-11 KVM
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-15
75/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Front Panel
Figure 4-12 shows the front panel of the KVM.
Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM
(1) Handles
(2) Switch on the KVM
Back Panel
Figure 4-13 shows the back panel of the KVM.
Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM
(1) Grounding bolt
(2) DC input power socket
(3) Power switch
(4) Ports used to connect to the keyboard, video, and mouse
NOTE
To insert the KVM into the cabinet, press the white buttons on both sides of the KVM and slide the buttons
with index fingers, and at the same time insert the KVM into the cabinet. Then, release the buttons.
4.7 LAN Switch
The LAN switch is configured in the MPR.
The LAN switch has 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports. The LAN
switch connects the LMT PC to the BSC6900 and then connects the BSC6900 to the M2000.
Physical Appearance of the LAN Switch
The BSC6900 uses the Quidway S3026C LAN switches.
Figure 4-14 shows the LAN switch.
4-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
76/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-14 LAN switch
Front Panel of the LAN Switch
The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are mode switch button, configuration
port, LEDs, and Ethernet ports.
Figure 4-15 shows the front panel of the LAN switch.
Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch
(1) POWER LED
(2) Mode status LED (A/L LED)
(3) Mode status LED (D/S LED)
(4) Mode switch button (MODE button)
(5) 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports
(6) Configuration port (CONSOLE port)
NOTE
l
The CONSOLE port is used to configure the LAN switch to meet the requirements of the
BSC6900.
l
The MODE button is used to enable the LEDs for the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to display different
types of states.
LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch
There are three LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch: POWER LED, A/L LED, and D/S
LED.
Table 4-8 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-17
77/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch
LED
POWER
Color
Green
Yellow
(left)
Status
Description
ON
The LAN switch is powered on.
OFF
The LAN switch is powered off.
ON (blink)
The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is traffic over
the port.
OFF
A/L
ON
Green
(right)
The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is no traffic
over the port.
The port is in LINK OK mode (indicating correct
connection).
OFF
The port is in LINK FAULT mode (indicating no
connection) or in LINK ERROR mode (indicating
incorrect connection).
Yellow
(left)
ON
The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode.
OFF
The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode.
Green
(right)
ON
The rate of the Ethernet port is 100 Mbit/s.
OFF
The rate of the Ethernet port is 10 Mbit/s.
D/S
NOTE
Only ports 2, 4, 20, 22, 24 on the LAN switch are used.
Rear Panel of the LAN Switch
The components on the rear panel of the LAN switch are DC power socket and grounding post
for the PGND cable.
Figure 4-16 shows the rear panel of the LAN switch.
Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch
(1) DC power socket
(2) Grounding post for the PGND cable
4.8 GBAM
The
threeinmodels
of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.
The BSC6900
GBAM is uses
installed
the MPR.
4-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
78/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
4.8.1 Functions of GBAM
The GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal
(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
4.8.1 Functions of GBAM
The GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal
(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The GBAM performs the following functions:
l
Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,
security management, and loading management functions for the system
l
Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa
board of the BSC6900
4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-17 shows the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)
Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
The components on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are LEDs, ports, switches, and
a CD-ROM drive.
Figure 4-18 shows the front panel of the GBAM server (IBM X3650T).
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-19
79/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
Table 4-9 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
No.
Silkscreen Label
Description
1
None
CD-ROM drive
2
Power switch
3
Reset switch
4
CRT
The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm
indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it
indicates that a critical fault occurs in the system
and the system cannot work properly.
5
MJR
The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication.
When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a
major fault occurs in the system. Under this
circumstance, the system can still work properly;
however, the performance deteriorates
significantly.
6
MNR
The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm
indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it
indicates that a minor fault occurs in the system.
Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly.
7
4-20
PWR
The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm
indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it
indicates that the power supply for the system is
faulty.
8
Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
9
USB port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
80/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
No.
10
11
12
Silkscreen Label
0
1
ON
Description
Hard disk 0 activity LED. When this LED is on
(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 0 can
be normally read or written. When this LED is on
(yellow), it indicates that hard disk 0 is faulty.
Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on
(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can
be normally read or written. When this LED is on
(yellow), it indicates that hard disk 1 is faulty.
Main power LED
13
NIC0/NIC1 activity LED
14
System ID LED
15
ID switch, used to switch system IDs
16
None
NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the
system for fault diagnosis.
Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are power port, grounding post,
and other ports.
Figure 4-19 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM
Table 4-10 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-21
81/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
No.
Silkscreen
Label
Description
1
Alarms
DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the
GBAM)
2
None
PCI card bracket (with no card inserted)
3
None
PCI card bracket (with a card inserted)
4
None
10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
5
None
Power module
6
PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for the
mouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard.
7
Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
8
1
RJ45 NIC port 1
9
2
RJ45 NIC port 2
10
Port for the video
11
1
USB port 1
12
0
USB port 0
13
14
Server management port
Ultra320 SCSI port
15
Grounding post for the PGND cable
4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-20 shows the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
4-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
82/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Front Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
The components on the front panel of the GBAM (C5210) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CDROM drive.
Figure 4-21 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
Table 4-11 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
No.
1
2
Silkscreen
Label
None
3
Description
CD-ROM drive
Power switch
Reset switch
4
CRT
The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a critical fault occurs in
the system and the system cannot work properly.
5
MJR
The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a major fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly; however, the performance deteriorates significantly.
6
MNR
The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a minor fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly.
7
PWR
The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that the power supply for the
system is faulty.
8
Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
9
USB port
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-23
83/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
No.
Silkscreen
Label
Description
10
11
12
13
2
1
ON
Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it
indicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 2 is faulty.
Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it
indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 1 is faulty.
Main power LED
14
NIC0/NIC1 activity LED
15
System ID LED
16
ID switch, used to switch system IDs
17
None
NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system for
fault diagnosis.
Rear Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) are power port, grounding
post, and other ports.
Figure 4-22 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
Table 4-12 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
4-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
84/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
No.
1
Silkscreen
Label
1
Description
USB port 1
2
Port for the video
3
Ultra320 SCSI port
4
1
RJ45 NIC port 1
5
Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Yshaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to the
GBAM (C5210).
6
Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
7
2
8
None
9
USB port 2
10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
Grounding post for the PGND cable
10
None
DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48 V
power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN cable.)
11
Alarms
DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the
GBAM)
12
0
RJ45 NIC port 0
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-23 shows the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310)
Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
The
components
a CD-ROM
drive.on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are LEDs, ports, switches, and
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-25
85/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Figure 4-24 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
Table 4-13 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
No.
Silkscreen
Label
Description
1
None
CD-ROM drive
2
Power switch
3
Reset switch
4
CRT
The
is usedthat
for alarm
indication.
When
LEDCRT
is on(Critical)
(yellow),LED
it indicates
a critical
fault occurs
in the
the
system and the system cannot work properly.
5
MJR
The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a major fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly; however, the performance deteriorates significantly.
6
MNR
The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a minor fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly.
7
PWR
The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that the power supply for the
system is faulty.
8
Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
9
USB port
10
4-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
86/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
No.
11
12
13
Silkscreen
Label
2
1
ON
Description
Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it
indicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 2 is faulty.
Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it
indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 1 is faulty.
Main power LED
14
NIC0/NIC1 activity LED
15
System ID LED
16
ID switch, used to switch system IDs
17
None
NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system for
fault diagnosis.
Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are power port, grounding post,
and other ports.
Figure 4-25 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
Table 4-14 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-27
87/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
No.
1
Silkscreen Label
1
Description
USB port 1
2
Port for the video
3
Ultra320 SCSI port
4
1
RJ45 NIC port 1
5
Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a
Y-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to
the GBAM (HP CC3310).
6
Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
7
2
8
None
9
USB port 2
10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
Grounding post for the PGND cable
10
None
DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48
V power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN
cable.)
11
Alarms
DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the
GBAM)
12
0
RJ45 NIC port 0
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack
Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack
The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack
The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack
The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
The fan box can be configured with either the PFCU or the PFCB board, which does not affect
the appearance of the independent fan subrack.
4-28
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
88/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack
Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack
(1) PFCB or PFCU board
(2) Fans
(4) Screw
(5) LED on the fan box
(3) Handle of the independent fan subrack
NOTE
l
The PFCU or the PFCB is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.18
PFCU Board. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.19 PFCB Board.
l
When the PFCU board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the
fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For
details, see 5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board) .
l
When the PFCB board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the
fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For
details, see 5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board) .
Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack
Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack
(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power (2) Power input port
distribution box
(3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)
(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack
The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power
(EMC).supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-29
89/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4 Components of the Cabinet
Table 4-15 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.
Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack
4-30
Item
Specification
Dimensions
86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)
Weight
Empty subrack: ≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: ≤ 6.9
kg
Power supply
-48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60
V DC.
Maximum power consumption
≤ 150
Fan speed
< 5.0 m/s
EMC
Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1
(2000-03).
W
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
90/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
5
Subracks
About This Chapter
This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.
5.1 Classification of Subracks
Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended
processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).
5.2 Components of the Subrack
The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
5.3 Fan Box
The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan
box.
5.4 Slots in the Subrack
The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane.
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack
BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
5-1
91/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
5.1 Classification of Subracks
Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended
processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).
MPS
As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured
in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and
maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.
EPS
As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the
basic services of the BSC6900.
TCS
As the transcoder subrack, the TCS is configured in the MPR, EPR, or TCR in BM/TC separated
configuration mode. It performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.
5.2 Components of the Subrack
The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
Structure of the Subrack
In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in
height. Figure 5-1 shows the construction of the subrack with the front and rear views of the
component layouts of the subrack.
5-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
92/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack
(1) Fan box
(2) Mounting ear
(3) Guide rail
(4) Front cable trough
(5) Boards
(6) Grounding screw
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
5-3
93/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the
power distribution box
(9) Cover plate of the DIP switch
Components
Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.
Table 5-1 Components of the subrack
Component
Refer to...
Fan box
5.3 Fan Box
Slots in the subrack
5.4 Slots in the Subrack
Front cable trough
The front cable trough is used to lead the cables
from the front of the subrack to both sides of the
cabinet.
Backplane
The backplane is used to connect the boards in
the same subrack.
5.3 Fan Box
The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan
box.
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.
Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.
5-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
94/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
(1) Power unit of the fan box
(2) Fans
(3) PFCU board
(4) LED on the fan box
(5) Screws
(6) Handles of the fan box
NOTE
l
The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and
keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operation of the fans.
l
The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.18 PFCU
Board.
LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.
Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Color
Status
Description
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The fan box works normally (the
fan box is registered).
ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s
The fan box works normally (the
fan box is not registered).
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
5-5
95/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Color
Status
Description
Red
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The fan box is registered and has
one of the following problems:
ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s
l
One-way power supply to
the subrack
l
Communication failure
l
Fans ceasing to run or
running at too low a speed
l
Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure
The fan box is not registered and
has one of the following
problems:
l One-way power supply to
the subrack
l
Fans ceasing to run or
running at a too low speed
l
Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure
NOTE
When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa/SCUb board in the
same subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box
and the SCUa/SCUb board in the same subrack is not established.
Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,
detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.
Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
5-6
Item
Specification
Space height
1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)
Input voltage range
-42 V DC to -60 V DC
Maximum power
150 W
Detectable temperature range
-5°C to 55°C
Requirement for fan speed adjustment
The speed of the fans can be adjusted from
55% to 100% of the full speed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
96/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
NOTE
When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.
Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-3 shows the fan box.
Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
(1) PFCB Board
(2) Fans
(4) Screw
(5) Handles of the fan box
(3) LED on the fan box
NOTE
l
The PFCB board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.19 PFCB
Board.
LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-4 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
5-7
97/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Color
Status
Description
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
The fan box is supplied with power in
1s
two ways without any fault (and is
registered).
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The fan box is supplied with power in
two ways without any fault (not
registered).
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The fan box is registered and has one of
the following problems:
Red
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
l
One-way power supply to the
subrack
l
Communication failure
l
Fans ceasing to run or running at too
low a speed
l
Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure
l
Speed adjustment function failure
The fan box is not registered and has one
of the following problems:
l
l
One-way power supply to the
subrack
Fans ceasing to run or running at a
too low speed
l
Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure
l
Speed adjustment function failure
NOTE
When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa/SCUb board in the
same subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box
and the SCUa/SCUb board in the same subrack is not established.
Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, input voltage range,
maximum power, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.
5-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
98/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Item
Specification
Space height
1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)
Input voltage range
-40 V DC to -57 V DC
Maximum power
150 W
Detectable temperature range
-5°C to +55°C
Requirement for fan speed adjustment
The speed of the fans can be adjusted from
55% to 100% of the full speed.
NOTE
When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.
5.4 Slots in the Subrack
The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane.
Figure 5-4 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack
(1) Front slot
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
(2) Backplane
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
(3) Rear slot
5-9
99/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
NOTE
l
Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered
from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.
l
Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair
of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active and
standby slots.
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
Location of the DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.
Appearance
Figure 5-5 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack
Description about the DIP Switch
The
DIP
subrack
has eight
numbered
in ascending
order from 1 to 8. The
higher
theswitch
bit is,on
thethe
more
significant
it is.bits
the bits.
Table
5-6 describes
5-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
100/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Table 5-6 Description about the bits
Bit
Description
1-5
Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.
6
Odd parity check bit
7
Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON
8 (the most significant
bit)
Reserved
Principle of the DIP Switch Setting
As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1.
Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2.
Set bit 7 to ON.
3.
Note that the setting of bit 8 remains unchanged.
4.
Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.
l
If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l
If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.
Table 5-7 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch
Subr
ack
No.
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
2
3
4
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Setting of the
DIP Switch
5-11
101/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Subr
ack
No.
5
Bit
Setting of the
DIP Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
ON
OF
F
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
OFF
ON
OF
F
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack
BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS
The configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS
The configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS
In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS
The configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUc board, SCUb board, GCUa board,
GCGa board, TNUa board, XPUa/XPUb board, DPUf board, DPUg board, EIUa board, FG2a/
FG2c board, GOUa/GOUc board, POUc board, OIUa board, and PEUa board.
The following figures show the MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated, BM/TC
combined, and A over IP configuration modes.
5-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
102/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode
Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
5-13
103/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode
NOTE
l
The INT1 board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board,
POUc board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l
The INT2 board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, or POUc board.
l
If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in the
MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode).
For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and how to
maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS
The configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUb board, TNUa board, XPUa/XPUb
board, DPUf board, DPUg board, EIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, GOUa/GOUc board, POUc
board, OIUa board, and PEUa board.
The following figures show the EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated, BM/TC
combined, and A over IP configuration modes.
5-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
104/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode
Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
5-15
105/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode
NOTE
l
The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, POUc
board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l
If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in the
MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode).
For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and how to
maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.
5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS
In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.
By default, the TCS must be configured with the SCUb board and TNUa board. The DPUf/
DPUg board and EIUa/OIUa board are optional boards.
Figure 5-12 shows the TCS in full configuration when E1/T1 transmission is used on the A
interface.
Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)
5-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
106/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5 Subracks
Figure 5-13 shows the TCS in full configuration when STM-1 transmission is used on the A
interface.
Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Table 5-8 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.
Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack
Item
Specification
Dimensions
530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)
Available space height
12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)
Weight
Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards:
≤ 57 kg
Power consumption in full
configuration
l
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
l
MPS: ≤ 1,200 W
EPS: ≤ 1,200 W
l
TCS: ≤ 1,000 W
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
5-17
107/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
108/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6
Boards
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.
The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.
Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.
Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards
Board
Logical Function
Function
Description
Board Name
DPUa
GTC (GSM BSC TC)
GSM speech service
processing
Data Processing Unit
REV:a
DPUc
GTC (GSM BSC TC)
GSM speech service
processing
Data Processing Unit
REV: c
DPUd
GPCU (GSM BSC PCU)
GSM packet service
processing
Data Processing Unit
REV:d
DPUf
GTC (GSM BSC TC)
GSM speech service
processing
Data Processing Unit
REV: f
DPUg
GPCU (GSM BSC PCU)
GSM packet service
processing
Data Processing Unit
REV:g
EIUa
Abis_TDM
-
Ater_TDM
-
32-port E1/T1 circuit
Interface Unit REV:a
Pb_TDM
-
A_TDM
-
GbIP (GSM BSC Gb IP
interface)
-
8-port FE or 2-port
electronic GE interface
IP
-
unit REV:a
FG2a
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-1
109/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Board
Logical Function
Function
Description
Board Name
FG2c
IP
-
12-port FE or 4-port
electronic GE interface
unit REV:c
GCUa
Clock
-
General Clock Unit
REV:a
GOUa
IP
-
2-port packet over GE
Optical interface Unit
REV:a
GOUc
IP
-
4-port packet over GE
Optical interface Unit
REV:c
OIUa
Abis_TDM
-
Ater_TDM
-
1-port channelized
Optical STM-1 Interface
Unit REV:a
Pb_TDM
-
A_TDM
-
OMUa
OAM (Operation,
Administration and
Maintenance)
OM management
Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:a
OMUb
OAM (Operation,
OM management
Operation and
Administration and
Maintenance)
OMUc
OAM (Operation,
Administration and
Maintenance)
OM management
Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:c
PEUa
FR
-
HDLC
-
32-port Packet over E1/
T1/J1 interface Unit
REV:a
IP
-
TDM
-
IP
-
SCUa
MAC Switching
-
GE Switching network
and Control Unit REV:a
SCUb
MAC Switching
-
GE Switching network
and Control Unit REV:b
TNUa
TDM Switching
-
TDM switching Network
Unit REV:a
POUc
6-2
Maintenance Unit REV:b
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
4-port IP over
channelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3 interface
Unit REV:c
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
110/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Board
Logical Function
Function
Description
Board Name
XPUa
GCP (GSM BSC Control
plane Process)
GSM BSC control
plane processing
eXtensible Processing
Unit REV:a
RGCP (Resource
Management and GSM
BSC Control plane Process)
Resource
management and
GSM BSC control
plane processing
MCP (Mathematics
Computing Process)
Mathematical
computing
GCP (GSM BSC Control
plane Process)
GSM BSC control
plane processing
RGCP (Resource
Management and GSM
BSC Control plane Process)
Resource
management and
GSM BSC control
plane processing
MCP (Mathematics
Computing Process)
Mathematical
computing
PAMU
-
-
Power Allocation
Monitoring Unit
PFCU
-
-
Fan Control Unit
PFCB
-
-
Fan Control Board
XPUb
eXtensible Processing
Unit REV:b
6.1 DPUa Board
DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the
TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed
in the TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.
6.2 DPUc Board
DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed in
slots
to
27.0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8
6.3 DPUd Board
DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.4 DPUf Board
DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. The DPUf board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to twelve DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.5 DPUg Board
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-3
111/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
DPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g. For the MPS, the DPUg board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUg board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.6 EIUa Board
EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It can
be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on site
requirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS or
TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.7 FG2a Board
FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots
14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.8 FG2c Board
FG2c refers
to be
12-port
FE or
4-port
electronic
interface
unit REV:c.
FG2c
is
optional.
It can
installed
in the
MPS
and in theGE
EPS.
The number
of FG2cThe
boards
to board
be installed
depends on site requirements. The FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/
EPS.
6.9 GCUa/GCGa Board
GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.
6.10 GOUa Board
GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the
EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.11 GOUc Board
GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. The GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the
MPS/EPS.
6.12 MDMC Board
MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the
common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one
MDMC board.
6.13 OIUa Board
OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.14 OMUa/OMUb Board
OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb refers to Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:b. One or two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in the
BSC6900. The width of the OMUa/OMUb board is twice the width of other boards. Therefore,
one OMUa/OMUb board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20
to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
6-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
112/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.15 OMUc Board
OMUc refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:c. A pair of active/standby OMUc boards
must be configured. The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24
to 27 in the MPS. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.
6.16 PAMU Board
PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.
6.17 PEUa Board
PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.18 PFCU Board
PFCU
to Fan Control
Unit.
The board.
PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan
boxrefers
is configured
with one
PFCU
6.19 PFCB Board
PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCB board.
6.20 POUc Board
POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of POUc boards
to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be installed in
slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27. For the TCS, the
POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.21 SCUa Board
SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.22 SCUb Board
SCUb refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:b. The SCUb board is mandatory.
Two SCUb boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.23 TNUa Board
TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or two
TNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.24 XPUa Board
XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten
XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.25 XPUb Board
XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten
XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.26 WOPB Board
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-5
113/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power
distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.
6-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
114/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.1 DPUa Board
DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the
TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed
in the TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board
The DPUa board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board
The technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board
The DPUa board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
The DPUa board performs the following functions:
l
Encodes and decodes voice services
l
Provides data service rate adaptation
l
Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.
l
Provides the voice enhancement function
l
Detects voice faults automatically
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.
Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the DPUa board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-7
115/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.
Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
The board is functional.
1s
6-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
116/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board in active mode.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board
The technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
Table 6-3 describes the technical specifications of the DPUa board.
Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
60 W
Weight
1.26 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
Operating temperature (short-term)
0°C to 45°C
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
6.2 DPUc Board
DPUc
to Data
Unit
Forthe
theEPS,
MPS,
the
DPUc
board
can
installed
slots 0 refers
to 3, slots
8 toProcessing
11, and slots
14 REV:c.
to 23. For
the
DPUc
board
can
bebe
installed
inin
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-9
117/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8
to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board
The DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board
There are only LEDs on the DPUc board.
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board
The technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board
The DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.
The DPUc board performs the following functions:
l
Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions
The DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding functions in any of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abis
over HDLC.
l
Encodes and decodes voice services
The DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding function in either of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The DPUc board
in the TCS performs the preceding function in BM/TC separated configuration mode.
l
Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.
l
l
Provides the voice enhancement function
Detects voice faults automatically
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board
There are only LEDs on the DPUc board.
Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the DPUc board.
6-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
118/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.
Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-11
119/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board
The technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-5 describes the technical specifications of the DPUc board.
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
49.40 W
Weight
1.26 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Processing capability
Supporting 960 TCH/Fs; supporting 3,740 IWF
flow numbers
6.3 DPUd Board
DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
slots
slots 0
0 to
to 3,
3, slots
slots 8
8 to
to 11,
27. and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
6-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
120/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board
The DPUd board processes GSM PS services.
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board
The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board
The DPUd board processes GSM PS services.
The DPUd board performs the following functions:
l
Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9
l
Processes packet links
l
Detects packet faults automatically
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.
Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the DPUd board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-13
121/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.
Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board
6-14
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF
for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and
OFF for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
122/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board
The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-7 describes the technical specifications of the DPUd board.
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/
standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption
49.40 W
Weight
1.26 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Processing capability
Processing the PS services on up to 1,024
simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-15
123/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.4 DPUf Board
DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. The DPUf board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to twelve DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board
The DPUf board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board
The technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board
The DPUf board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
The DPUf board performs the following functions:
l
Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions
The DPUf board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding functions in any of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abis
over HDLC.
l
Encodes and decodes voice services
The DPUf board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding function in either of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined, or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The DPUf
board in the TCS performs the preceding function in BM/TC separated configuration mode.
l
Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.
l
Provides the voice enhancement function
l
Detects voice faults automatically
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.
Figure 6-4 shows the panel of the DPUf board.
6-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
124/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.
Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
The board is functional.
1s
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-17
125/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board
The technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-9 describes the technical specifications of the DPUf board.
Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board
6-18
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
80 W
Weight
1.20 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
Operating temperature (short-term)
0°C to 45°C
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Processing capability
l
Supporting 1,920 TCHFs
l
Supporting 7,680 IWF flow numbers in the
case of all-IP networking; Supporting 3,840
IWF flow numbers in the case of Abis over
TDM or Ater over TDM
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
126/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.5 DPUg Board
DPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g. For the MPS, the DPUg board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUg board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board
The DPUg board processes GSM PS services.
6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUg board.
6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board
The technical specifications of the DPUg board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board
The DPUg board processes GSM PS services.
The DPUf board performs the following functions:
l
Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9
l
Processes packet links
l
Detects packet faults automatically
6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUg board.
Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the DPUg board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-19
127/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-5 Panel of the DPUg board
6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
128/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-10 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board.
Table 6-10 LEDs on the DPUg board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF
for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and
OFF for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board
The technical specifications of the DPUg board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-11 describes the technical specifications of the DPUg board.
Table 6-11 Technical specifications of the DPUg board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
62.32 W
Weight
1.20 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-21
129/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Processing capability
Processing the PS services on up to 1,024
simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9
6.6 EIUa Board
EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It can
be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on site
requirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS or
TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.
6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.
6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT
port on the EIUa board.
6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board
The technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.
The EIUa board performs the following functions:
6-22
l
Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports for TDM transmission
l
Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048
Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s
l
Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol
l
Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
130/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
l
Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby EIUa
boards
l
Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side
l
Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces
6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.
Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the EIUa board.
Figure 6-6 Panel of the EIUa board
6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-12 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-23
131/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-12 LEDs on the EIUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
The board is functional.
1s
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT
port on the EIUa board.
Table 6-13 describes the ports on the EIUa board.
Table 6-13 Ports on the EIUa board
Port
Function
Connector Type
E1/T1 (0-7)
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and
receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 0-7
DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and
receive E1/T1 signals on
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23)
E1/T1 (24-31)
6-24
channels 8-15
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and
receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 16-23
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and
receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 24-31
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
DB44
DB44
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
132/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Port
Function
Connector Type
2M0 and 2M1
Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock
signal outputs, used to transmit
the clock signals obtained from
the line clock for system
reference
SMB male connector
TESTOUT
Port for clock signal outputs.
The clock signals are used for
testing.
SMB male connector
6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 6-7 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Figure 6-7 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
(1) Sub-board
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
(2) Bottom plate
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-25
133/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
NOTE
l
When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this
case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l
When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.
l
In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to
and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.
Table 6-14 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Table 6-14 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
DIP Switch
Bit
Description
Setting for 75ohm Coaxial
Cable
Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable
S1
8
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 0-7
ON
OFF
7
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 8-15
ON
OFF
6
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
16-23
ON
OFF
5
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
24-31
ON
OFF
1-4
Reserved
S3
1-8
TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 0-7
ON
OFF
S4
1-8
TX ground
ON
OFF
switch of E1s/
T1s 8-15
S5
1-8
TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 16-23
ON
OFF
S6
1-8
TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 24-31
ON
OFF
Table 6-15 describes the different DIP switches.
6-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
134/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-15 Description of the different DIP switches
DIP Switch
Description
E1/T1 impedance selection switch
Used to select the logical transmission mode of the
board and to notify the software of the current
transmission mode
E1/T1 TX ground switch
Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end
of the E1/T1 signals
NOTE
l
The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.
l
The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches
on the standby board.
l
The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.
6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board
The technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-16 describes the hardware specifications of the EIUa board.
Table 6-16 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/
standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption
28.60 W
Weight
1.16 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-17 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-27
135/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-17 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
384
A
CIC(64K)
960
Ater
CIC(16K)
3,840
Pb
CIC(16K)
3,840
6.7 FG2a Board
FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots
14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board
As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board
There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board
The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board
As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
The FG2a board performs the following functions:
6-28
l
Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports
l
Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
136/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
l
Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l
Supports the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2a board.
Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board,
and other
LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK
and ACT.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-29
137/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-18 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 6-18 LEDs on the FG2a board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
ALM
Red
ACT
Green
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board
There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-19 describes the ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-19 Ports on the FG2a board
6-30
Port
Function
Connector
Type
FE(1) to FE(3)
10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit
10/100M signals
RJ45
FE/GE(0)
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to
transmit 10/100/1000M signals
RJ45
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
138/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Port
Function
Connector
Type
2M0 and 2M1
Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs
SMB male
connector
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board
The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-20 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.
Table 6-20 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
38.48 W
Weight
1.36 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-21 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-21 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
384
A
CIC(64K)
6,144
Gb
Maximum payload throughput
(physical layer)
128 Mbit/s
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-31
139/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.8 FG2c Board
FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. The FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/
EPS.
6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board
As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board
There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board
The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board
As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The FG2c board performs the following functions:
l
Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channels
over GE ports
l
Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l
Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l
Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized
clock signals
l
Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE
l
The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l
The FG2c board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the FG2c board.
6-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
140/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board
6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-22 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.
Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2c board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-33
141/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Orange
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board
There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-23 describes the ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2c board
Port
Function
Connector
100BASE-T
100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M
signals
RJ45
100/1000BASE-T
100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to
transmit 100/1000M signals
RJ45
Type
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board
The
technical specifications
of the FG2c
board consist
of hardware
specifications
and of the
specifications
of the board processing
capability.
The hardware
specifications
consist
6-34
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
142/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-24 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.
Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/
standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption
85.4 W
Weight
1.50 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-25 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
2,048
A
CIC(64K)
23,040
Gb
Maximum payload throughput (physical
layer)
1,024 Mbit/s
6.9 GCUa/GCGa Board
GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.
6.9.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.
6.9.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.9.3
on the
GCUa/GCGa
Board
ThereLEDs
are three
LEDs
on the panel
of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-35
143/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.9.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.
6.9.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.
The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:
l
Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the
synchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signals
and the reference clock for the entire system
l
Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock
l
Generates RFN signals for the system
l
Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock
phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phase
in the case of active/standby switchover.
l
Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPS
card
6.9.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
6-36
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
144/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-10 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board
6.9.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-26 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-26 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-37
145/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
6.9.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-27 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-27 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board
6-38
Port
Function
Connector Type
ANT
Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGa
board is used to receive the timing signals and
positioning information from the GPS satellite. This
port is not used on the GCUa board.
SMA male
connector
CLKOUT0 to
CLKOUT9
Ports for providing synchronization clock signals.
The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signals
and 1PPS clock signals.
RJ45
COM0
Reserved
RJ45
COM1
Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals
RJ45
TESTOUT
Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are
used for testing.
SMB male
connector
TESTIN
Input port for testing external clock signals
SMB male
connector
CLKIN0 and
CLKIN1
Input port for BITS clock signals and line clock
signals
SMB male
connector
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
146/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.
Table 6-28 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-28 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
Weight
GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W
GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Clock accuracy grade
Grade three
6.10 GOUa Board
GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the
EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed
l
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUa Board
As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.10.4
Ports
onoptical
the GOUa
There are
two
portsBoard
and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-39
147/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board
The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUa Board
As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
The GOUa board performs the following functions:
l
Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission
l
Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l
Supports the A and Abis interfaces
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GOUa board.
6-40
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
148/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUa board
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-29 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 6-29 LEDs on the GOUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
The board is in loading
0.125s
state.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-41
149/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUa Board
There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-30 describes the ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-30 Ports on the GOUa board
Port
Function
Connector Type
RX
Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical
signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
and RX refers to the receiving optical port.
LC/PC
Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs
SMB male connector
TX
2M0 and
2M1
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board
The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-31 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.
Table 6-31 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board
6-42
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
150/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane
of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption
37.30 W
Weight
1.20 kg
Operating temperature
(long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature
(short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (longterm)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity
(short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-32 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-32 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
384
A
CIC(64K)
6,144
Table 6-33 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-33 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board
Item
Specification
Optical Module 1.25 G-850
Optical Module 1.25 G-1310
nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
nm-10 km-SM-ESFP
Mode
Multi-mode
Single mode
Type
LC/PC
LC/PC
Maximum optical
transmission
distance
0.5 km
10 km
Maximum output
optical power
-2.5 dBm
-3.0 dBm
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-43
151/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Optical Module 1.25 G-850
nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
Optical Module 1.25 G-1310
nm-10 km-SM-ESFP
Minimum output
optical power
-9.5 dBm
-9.5 dBm
Minimum receiver
sensitivity
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
Overload receive
optical power
0.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
Center wavelength
850 nm
1,310 nm
Transmission rate
1.25 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
6.11 GOUc Board
GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. The GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the
MPS/EPS.
6.11.1 Functions of the GOUc Board
As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
6.11.2 Panel of the GOUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
6.11.4 Ports on the GOUc Board
There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board
The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
6.11.1 Functions of the GOUc Board
As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The GOUc board performs the following functions:
6-44
l
Provides four channels over GE ports
l
Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l
Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
152/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
NOTE
l
The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l
The GOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
6.11.2 Panel of the GOUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the GOUc board.
Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUc board
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-45
153/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 6-34 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.
Table 6-34 LEDs on the GOUc board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
LINK (optical
port LED)
Green
ACT (optical
port LED)
Green
6.11.4 Ports on the GOUc Board
There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-35 describes the ports on the GOUc board.
6-46
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
154/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-35 Ports on the GOUc board
Port
Function
Connector Type
RX
Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical
LC/PC
TX
signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
and RX refers to the receiving optical port.
6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board
The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-36 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.
Table 6-36 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The
backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption
65.90 W
Weight
1.40 kg
Operating temperature
(long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature
(short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (longterm)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity
5% to 95%
(short-term)
Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-37 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
2,048
A
CIC(64K)
23,040
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-47
155/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Gb
Maximum payload throughput (physical
layer)
1,024 Mbit/s
Table 6-38 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-38 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board
Item
Specification
Optical Module 1.25
G-1310 nm-10 km-SMESFP
Optical Module 1.25 G-850
nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
Mode
Single mode
Multi-mode
Type
LC/PC
LC/PC
Center wavelength
1,310 nm
850 nm
Transmission rate
1.25 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
Transmission
distance
10 km
0.5 km
Maximum output
optical power
-3 dBm
-3 dBm
Minimum output
optical power
-9.5 dBm
-9 dBm
Minimum receiver
sensitivity
-23 dBm
-20 dBm
6.12 MDMC Board
MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the
common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one
MDMC board.
6.12.1 Functions of the MDMC Board
The MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.
6.12.2 Panel of the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.
6.12.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
6.12.4
DIP Switch
the MDMC
The MDMC
board on
provides
an S2 Board
DIP switch.
6-48
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
156/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.12.1 Functions of the MDMC Board
The MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.
The MDMC board performs the following functions:
l
Detects the voltage of two -48 V power inputs
l
Detects one output of external temperature sensor
l
Detects one output of external humidity sensor
l
Detects two lightning protection circuits
l
Detects the status of the power switches for six power outputs
l
Provides audible and visual alarms
l
Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, so as to report the working status of the power
distribution box and exchange operation & maintenance (O&M) information
6.12.2 Panel of the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.
Figure 6-13 shows the panel of the MDMC board.
Figure 6-13 Panel of the MDMC board
(1) Mute switch
NOTE
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l
If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
l
If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.
6.12.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-49
157/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-39 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Table 6-39 LEDs on the MDMC board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The MDMC board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The MDMC board is not working or it
does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.
OFF
The power supply to the MDMC board
is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON
The power distribution box is faulty.
During the self-check of the MDMC
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.
ALM
Red
6.12.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
Figure 6-14 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.
Figure 6-14 DIP switch on the MDMC board
With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.
To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 6-40.
6-50
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
158/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-40 DIP switch on the MDMC board
Address
Bit
Setting of DIP Bit
Description
0
1 (the most significant
ON
0
2
ON
0
3
ON
0
4 (the least significant
bit)
ON
0
bit)
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 6-40.
6.13 OIUa Board
OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed
l
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.13.1 Functions of the OIUa Board
The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.
6.13.2 Panel of the OIUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.
6.13.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.13.4 Ports on the OIUa Board
There are one optical port, two clock signal output ports, and one TESTOUT port on the OIUa
board.
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board
The technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
6.13.1 Functions of the OIUa Board
The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.
The OIUa board performs the following functions:
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-51
159/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
l
Provides one STM-1 port for TDM transmission
l
Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby OIUa boards
l
Provides one channelized STM-1 with the transmission rate of 155.52 Mbit/s
l
Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol
l
Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol
l
Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side
l
Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces
6.13.2 Panel of the OIUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.
Figure 6-15 shows the panel of the OIUa board.
Figure 6-15 Panel of the OIUa board
6.13.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6-52
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
160/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-41 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.
Table 6-41 LEDs on the OIUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF
The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.
ALM
ACT
LOS
Red
Green
Green
6.13.4 Ports on the OIUa Board
There are one optical port, two clock signal output ports, and one TESTOUT port on the OIUa
board.
Table 6-42 describes the ports on the OIUa board.
Table 6-42 Ports on the OIUa board
Port
Function
Connector
Type
RX
TX refers to the transmitting optical port, and RX refers to the
receiving optical port.
LC
2M0 and
2M1
Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signal outputs, used to transmit
the clock signals obtained from the line clock for system
reference
SMB male
connector
TESTO
UT
Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for
testing.
SMB male
connector
TX
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-53
161/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board
The technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist
of thehumidity.
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative
Table 6-43 describes the hardware specifications of the OIUa board.
Table 6-43 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane
of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption
20.80 W
Weight
0.94 kg
Operating temperature
(long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature
(short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (longterm)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity
(short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-44 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-44 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
384
A
CIC(64K)
1,920
Ater
CIC(16K)
7,168
Pb
CIC(16K)
7,168
Table 6-45 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board.
6-54
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
162/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-45 Specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board
Item
Specification
Optical Module 155
Optical Module 155 M-1310
M-1310 nm-15 km-SMESFP
nm-2 km-MM-SFP
Mode
Single mode
Multi-mode
Type
LC/PC
LC/PC
Center wavelength
1,310 nm
1,310 nm
Transmission rate
155.52 Mbit/s
155.52 Mbit/s
Transmission
distance
15 km
2 km
Maximum output
optical power
-8 dBm
-14 dBm
Minimum output
optical power
-15 dBm
-19 dBm
Maximum receiver
sensitivity
-31 dBm
-30 dBm
6.14 OMUa/OMUb
Board
OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb refers to Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:b. One or two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in the
BSC6900. The width of the OMUa/OMUb board is twice the width of other boards. Therefore,
one OMUa/OMUb board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20
to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
NOTE
This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUa/OMUb boards are installed
in slots 24 to 27.
6.14.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board
The OMUa/OMUb board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local
Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
6.14.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, there
are hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.
6.14.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
6.14.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-55
163/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa/OMUb board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk
capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.
6.14.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board
The OMUa/OMUb board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local
Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The OMUa/OMUb board performs the following functions:
l
Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,
security management, and loading management functions for the system
l
Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa
board of the BSC6900
6.14.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, there
are hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.
6-56
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
164/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-16 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board
(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever
(3) Self-locking latch
(4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED
(6) ACT LED
(7) RESET Button
(8) SHUTDOWN Button
(9) USB port
(10) ETH0 Ethernet port
(11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port
(13) COM port
(14) VGA port
(15) HD LEDs
(17) Hard disks
(18) Screws for fixing the hard disk
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
(16) OFFLINE LED
6-57
165/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
NOTE
l
l
l
l
To power off the OMUa/OMUb board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector
levers away from the front panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off
the power switch.
The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.
The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.
Powering off the board by pressing the SHUTDOWN button or resetting the system by pressing the
RESET button may scratch the surface of the hard disks of the OMUa board. Thus, avoid operating
the two buttons whenever possible.
6.14.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
Table 6-46 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-46 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.
ON
The board can be removed.
OFF
The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being switched over to
the other working mode.
OFF
There is no read or write operation
on the hard disk.
Blinking
The hard disk is being read or
written.
ALM
ACT
OFFLINE
HD
6-58
Red
Green
Blue
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
166/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.14.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-47 describes the ports on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-47 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board
Port
Function
Connector Type
USB0-1 and USB2-3
USB ports. These ports are used to
connect USB devices.
-
ETH0 to ETH2
GE ports
RJ45
COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC
Serial port. This port is used for
DB9
system commissioning or for
common serial port usage.
VGA
Port for the video
-
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board
This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa/OMUb board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk
capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.
Hardware Configuration Indexes
Table 6-48 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-48 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board
Index
Index of the OMUa Board Index of the OMUb Board
Size
366.7 mm x 220 mm
366.7 mm x 220 mm
Power supply
Two routes of
-48 Vmode
DC in
redundancy
backup
(provided by the backplane
of the subrack)
Two routes of
-48 Vmode
DC in
redundancy
backup
(provided by the backplane
of the subrack)
Power consumption
120 W
90 W
Weight
4.0 kg
3.5 kg
Hard disk capacity
146 GB x 2 (RAID 1)
146 GB x 2 (RAID 1)
Memory capacity
2 GB
2 GB
Temperature required when
working for a long time
5°C - 40°C
5°C - 40°C
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-59
167/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Index
Index of the OMUa Board Index of the OMUb Board
Temperature required when
working for a short time
0°C - 50°C
0°C - 50°C
Relative humidity required
when working for a long time
5%-85%
5%-85%
Relative humidity required
when working for a short
time
5%-95%
5%-95%
Performance Counters
Table 6-49 describes the performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-49 Performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board
Counter
Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board
Number of recorded
alarms
The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.
Time when the standby
OMU data is
synchronized with the
active OMU data
The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU board every second.
Duration of the
synchronization between
the active OMU files and
standby OMU files
Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies
according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
Duration of the
switchover between the
active and standby OMUs
Duration from when the request for OMU switchover is accepted
to when the switchover is finished. This duration lasts for two to
three minutes.
Duration of the OMU
restart
Duration of the OMU restart due to OMU fault. This duration
lasts for about three minutes.
6.15 OMUc Board
OMUc refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:c. A pair of active/standby OMUc boards
must be configured. The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24
to 27 in the MPS. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.
NOTE
l
This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUc boards are installed in
slots 24 to 25.
l
The OMUc and OMUa/OMUb boards cannot be installed in the same subrack.
6.15.1 Functions of the OMUc Board
6-60
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
168/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
The OMUc board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
6.15.2 Panel of the OMUc Board
There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUc board.
6.15.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
6.15.4 Ports on the OMUc Board
There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0, and one VGA port on the
OMUc board.
6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board
This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUc board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity,
memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.
6.15.1 Functions of the OMUc Board
The OMUc board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The OMUc board performs the following functions:
l
Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,
security management, and loading management functions for the system
l
Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUb
board of the BSC6900
6.15.2 Panel of the OMUc Board
There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUc board.
Figure 6-17 shows the panel of the OMUc board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-61
169/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-17 Panel of the OMUc board
(1) Captive screw
(2) Ejector lever
(3) Self-locking latch
(4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED
(6) ACT LED
(7) POWER Button
(8) HDD LED
(9) OFL LED
(10) COM port
(11) ETH0 Ethernet port
(12) ETH1 Ethernet port
(13) VGA port
(14) USB port
(15) ETH2 Ethernet port
NOTE
To power off the OMUc board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away
from the front panel of the OMUc board. After the OFL (OFFLINE) LED is on, turn off the power switch.
6-62
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
170/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.15.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
Table 6-50 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.
Table 6-50 LEDs on the OMUc board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.
ON
The board can be removed.
OFF
The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being switched over to
the other working mode.
OFF
There is no read or write operation
on the hard disk.
Blinking
The hard disk is being read or
written.
ALM
ACT
OFL
HDD
Red
Green
Blue
Green
6.15.4 Ports on the OMUc Board
There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0, and one VGA port on the
OMUc board.
Table 6-51 describes the ports on the OMUc board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-63
171/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-51 Ports on the OMUc board
Port
Function
Connector Type
USB0-1 and USB2-3
USB ports. These ports are used to
TYPE-A
connect USB devices.
ETH0 to ETH2
GE ports.
RJ45
COM
Serial port. This port is used for
system commissioning or for
common serial port usage.
DB9
VGA
Port for the video.
DB15
6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board
This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUc board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity,
memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.
Hardware Configuration Indexes
Table 6-52 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board.
Table 6-52 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board
6-64
Index
Index of the OMUc Board
Size
366.7 mm x 220 mm
Power supply
Two routes of -48 V DC in redundancy backup mode
(provided by the backplane of the subrack)
Power consumption
90 W
Weight
2.5 kg
Hard disk capacity
500 GB
Memory capacity
8 GB
Temperature required when
working for a long time
5°C - +40°C
Temperature required when
working for a short time
0°C - +50°C
Relative humidity required when
working for a long time
5%-85%
Relative humidity required when
working for a short time
5%-95%
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
172/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Performance Counters
Table 6-53 describes the performance counters of the OMUc board.
Table 6-53 Performance counters of the OMUc board
Counter
Index of the OMUc Board
Number of recorded
alarms
The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.
Time when the standby
OMU data is
synchronized with the
active OMU data
The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU board every second.
Duration of the
Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies
synchronization
the
active OMU between
files and
standby OMU files
according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
Duration of the
switchover between the
active and standby OMUs
Duration from when the request for OMU switchover is accepted
to when the switchover is finished. This duration lasts for two to
three minutes.
Duration of the OMU
restart
Duration of the OMU restart due to OMU fault. This duration
lasts for about three minutes.
6.16 PAMU Board
PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.
6.16.1 Functions of the PAMU Board
The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.
6.16.2 Panel of the PAMU Board
On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
6.16.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
6.16.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board
The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-65
173/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.16.1 Functions of the PAMU Board
The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.
The PAMU board performs the following functions:
l
Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms
l
Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms
l
Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board
l
Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports
6.16.2 Panel of the PAMU Board
On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
Figure 6-18 shows the panel of the PAMU board.
Figure 6-18 Panel of the PAMU board
(1) RUN LED
(2) ALM LED
(3) Mute switch
NOTE
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l
l
6-66
If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
174/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.16.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 6-54 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 6-54 LEDs on the PAMU board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The PAMU board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
OFF
The power supply to the PAMU board
is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON
The power distribution box is faulty.
During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.
ALM
Red
6.16.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 6-19 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
Figure 6-19 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board
With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To
set
. the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
6-55
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-67
175/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-55 DIP switch on the PAMU board
Address
Bit
Setting of DIP Bit
Description
0
1 (the most significant
ON
0
2
ON
0
3
ON
0
4 (the least significant
bit)
ON
0
bit)
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-55.
6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board
The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.
Table 6-56 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.
Table 6-56 Technical specifications of the PAMU board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
Power supply
340 mm × 72 mm
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode
Power consumption
15 W
Weight
0.2 kg
6.17 PEUa Board
PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.17.1 Functions of the PEUa Board
As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
6.17.2 Panel of the PEUa Board
6-68
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
176/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
6.17.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.17.4 Ports on the PEUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
6.17.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
6.17.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board
The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
6.17.1 Functions
of the PEUa Board
As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
The PEUa board performs the following functions:
l
Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1
l
Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP
links
l
Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa
boards
l
Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission
l
rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.
Supports the Abis and Gb interfaces
6.17.2 Panel of the PEUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
Figure 6-20 shows the panel of the PEUa board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-69
177/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-20 Panel of the PEUa board
6.17.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-57 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.
Table 6-57 LEDs on the PEUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
6-70
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
178/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
Color
Status
Description
ALM
Red
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ACT
Green
6.17.4 Ports on the PEUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-58 describes the ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-58 Ports on the PEUa board
Port
Function
Connector
Type
E1/T1 (0-7)
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1
signals on channels 0-7
DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1
signals on channels 8-15
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23)
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1
signals on channels 16-23
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31)
E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1
signals on channels 24-31
DB44
2M0 and 2M1
Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs
SMB male
connector
6.17.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 6-21 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-71
179/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-21 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board
(1) Sub-board
6-72
(2) Bottom plate
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
180/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
NOTE
l
All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-21, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-21 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l
You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l
If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-59 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.
Table 6-59 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIP
Switc
h
Bit
Description
Setting of DIP
Switch
Meaning
S2
1-8
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
S4
S6
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
1-8
1-8
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-73
181/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
DIP
Switc
h
S8
Bit
1-8
S10
1-2
Description
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15
DIP switch for setting the
working mode,
consisting of two bits
Setting of DIP
Switch
Meaning
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
(ON, ON)
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
(OFF, ON)
Setting the
working mode to
E1 balanced
mode
(ON, OFF)
Setting the
working mode to
T1 mode
(OFF, OFF)
Setting the
working mode to
J1 mode
NOTE
All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.
6.17.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board
The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-60 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.
Table 6-60 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board
6-74
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
182/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
27.53 W
Weight
1.30 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-61 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-61 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
384
Gb
Maximum payload
throughput (physical layer)
64 Mbit/s
A
CIC (64K)
6144
6.18 PFCU Board
PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.18.1 Functions of the PFCU Board
The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.18.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
6.18.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.
6.18.1 Functions of the PFCU Board
The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-75
183/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
The PFCU board performs the following functions:
l
Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED
l
l
Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, to report the working status of the fan box
Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors
l
Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed
l
Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED
6.18.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-22 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 6-22 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-62. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 6-62 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
6-76
DIP Switch
Bit
Setting of DIP
Switch
Description
SW1
1 (the least significant
bit)
OFF
1
2
ON
0
3
ON
0
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON
0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
184/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-23 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 6-23 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-63. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.
Table 6-63 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch
Bit
Setting of DIP
Switch
Description
SW1
1 (the least significant
bit)
ON
0
2
ON
0
3
OFF
1
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON
0
NOTE
The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
6.18.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.
Table 6-64 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.
Table 6-64 Technical specifications of the PFCU board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
270 mm x 35 mm
Input voltage range
-40 V DC to -57 V DC
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-77
185/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Frequency of PWM signals
1 kHz
Detectable temperature range
-5°C to +55°C(basic requirement)
Requirement for fan speed adjustment
The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%
to 100% of the full speed.
6.19 PFCB Board
PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCB board.
6.19.1 Functions of the PFCB Board
The PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.19.2 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
6.19.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and
requirement for fan speed adjustment.
6.19.1 Functions of the PFCB Board
The PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
The PFCB board performs the following functions:
l
Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED
l
Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, to report the working status of the fan box,
and responds to the fan speed adjustment command
l
Collects temperature information through temperature sensors and intelligently adjusts the
fan speed based on the temperature information
l
Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed
l
Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED
6.19.2 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-24 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
6-78
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
186/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-24 Pins on the PFCB board
To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 6-65.
Table 6-65 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
Pin
Numb
er
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-10
11-12
13-14
15-16
Connec
ted to
jumper
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-25 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 6-25 Pins on the PFCB board
To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 6-66.
Table 6-66 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)
Pin
Numb
er
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-10
11-12
13-14
15-16
Connec
ted to
jumper
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-79
187/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
NOTE
The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
6.19.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and
requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 6-67 describes the technical specifications of the PFCB board.
Table 6-67 Technical specifications of the PFCB board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
390 mm × 50 mm
Input voltage range
-40 V DC to -57 V DC
Frequency of PWM signals
1 kHz
Detectable temperature range
-5°C to +55°C(basic requirement)
Requirement for fan speed adjustment
The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%
to 100% of the full speed.
6.20 POUc Board
POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of POUc boards
to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be installed in
slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27. For the TCS, the
POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.20.1 Functions of the POUc Board
As an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
6.20.2 Panel of the POUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
6.20.3 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.20.4 Ports on the POUc Board
There are four optical ports on the POUc board.
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board
6-80
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
188/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
6.20.1 Functions of the POUc Board
As an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
The POUc board performs the following functions:
l
Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on TDM/IP
protocol
l
Supports the PPP function
l
Extracts line clock signals
l
Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUc boards
l
Supports the A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb interfaces
NOTE
The POUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. These two CPUs perform different functions when the
ports on the POUc board use different transmission modes.
l
When the ports on the POUc board use IP transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance, and CPU1 mainly performs the control plane
functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
l
When the ports on the POUc board use TDM transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management
plane and control plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics
reporting, transmission port management and maintenance, as well as establishment and clearing of
channels for data flows, and CPU1 mainly processes the signaling according to the MTP2 and Ater SL
protocols.
6.20.2 Panel of the POUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the POUc board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-81
189/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-26 Panel of the POUc board
6.20.3 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 6-68 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.
Table 6-68 LEDs on the POUc board
6-82
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
190/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
LOS
Color
Red
Green
Green
Status
Description
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF
The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.
6.20.4 Ports on the POUc Board
There are four optical ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-69 describes the ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-69 Ports on the POUc board
Port
Function
Connector Type
RX
Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical
signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
and RX refers to the receiving optical port.
LC/PC
TX
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board
The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-70 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.
Table 6-70 Hardware specifications of the POUc board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-83
191/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
77.25 W
Weight
1.50 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-71 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM
transmission mode.
Table 6-71 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission
mode
Item
Specification
Abis
TRX
512
A
CIC(64K)
3,906
Ater
CIC(16K)
7,168
Pb
CIC(16K)
7,168
Gb
Maximum payload throughput (physical
layer)
504 Mbit/s
Table 6-72 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP
transmission mode.
Table 6-72 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission
mode
Item
6-84
Specification
Abis
TRX
2,048
A
CIC(64K)
23,040
Ater
CIC(16K)
23,040 (The TC subrack supports
only 13,000 CICs.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
192/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-73 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC
transmission mode.
Table 6-73 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC transmission
mode
Item
Abis
Specification
TRX
2,048
Table 6-74 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-74 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board
Item
Specification
Optical Module 155
M-1310 nm-2 kmMM-SFP
Optical Module 155
M-1310 nm-15 kmSM-ESFP
Optical Module 155
M-1310 nm-40 kmSM-ESFP
Mode
Multi-mode
Single mode
Single mode
Type
LC/PC
LC/PC
LC/PC
Maximum
optical
transmission
distance
2 km
15 km
40 km
Maximum
output optical
power
-14.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm
0.0 dBm
Minimum
output optical
power
-19.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm
Minimum
receiver
sensitivity
-30.0 dBm
-31.0 dBm
-37.0 dBm
Center
wavelength
1,310 nm
1,310 nm
1,310 nm
Transmission
rate
155.52 Mbit/s
155.52 Mbit/s
155.52 Mbit/s
6.21 SCUa Board
SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-85
193/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.21.1 Functions of the SCUa Board
The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
6.21.2 Panel of the SCUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
6.21.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.21.4 Ports on the SCUa Board
There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and
one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board
The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
6.21.1 Functions of the SCUa Board
The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
The SCUa board performs the following functions:
l
Provides the maintenance management function
l
l
Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900
Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet
l
Supports the port trunking function
l
Supports the active/standby switchover
l
Enables inter-subrack connections
l
Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s
l
Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900
6.21.2 Panel of the SCUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the SCUa board.
6-86
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
194/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-27 Panel of the SCUa board
6.21.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-75 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.
Table 6-75 LEDs on the SCUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-87
195/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
6.21.4 Ports on the SCUa Board
There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and
one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
Table 6-76 describes the ports on the SCUa board.
Table 6-76 Ports on the SCUa board
6-88
Port
Function
Connector
Type
10/100/100
0BASE-T0
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T9
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the intersubrack connection.
RJ45
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
196/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Port
Function
Connector
Type
10/100/100
0BASET10 to
10/100/100
0BASET11
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, the two ports are unused
in the BSC6900.
RJ45
COM
Serial port for commissioning.
RJ45
CLKIN
Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8
kHz clock signals from the GCUa board.
RJ45
TESTOUT
Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for
testing.
SMB male
connector
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board
The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
Table 6-77 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.
Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the SCUa board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
54.5 W
Weight
1.2 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Switching capacity
60 Gbit/s
6.22 SCUb Board
SCUb
refersboards
to GE Switching
network
Control
REV:b.
The SCUb board is mandatory.
Two SCUb
must be installed
inand
slots
6 and 7Unit
in the
MPS/EPS/TCS.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-89
197/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
NOTE
The SCUb and SCUa boards cannot be installed in the same subrack.
6.22.1 Functions of the SCUb Board
The SCUb board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of the
BSC6900.
6.22.2 Panel of the SCUb Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUb board.
6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
6.22.4 Ports on the SCUb Board
There are 15 ports on the SCUb board.
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board
The technical specifications of the SCUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
6.22.1 Functions of the SCUb Board
The SCUb board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of the
BSC6900.
The SCUb board performs the following functions:
l
Provides the maintenance management function
l
Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900
l
Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet
l
Supports the port trunking function
l
Supports the active/standby switchover
l
Enables inter-subrack connections
l
Provides a total switching capacity of 240 Gbit/s
l
Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900
6.22.2 Panel of the SCUb Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUb board.
Figure 6-28 shows the panel of the SCUb board.
6-90
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
198/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-28 Panel of the SCUb board
6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
Table 6-78 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.
Table 6-78 LEDs on the SCUb board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-91
199/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
10G LINK
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
6.22.4 Ports on the SCUb Board
There are 15 ports on the SCUb board.
Table 6-79 describes the ports on the SCUb board.
Table 6-79 Ports on the SCUb board
6-92
Port
Function
Connector
Type
10/100/100
0BASE-T0
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T7
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the intersubrack connection
RJ45
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
200/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Port
Function
Connector
Type
10G-T8 to
10G-T811
10 Gbit/s Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrack
connection. These ports can use SFP+ High-Speed cable
transmission.
SFP+
COM
Serial port for commissioning
RJ45
CLKIN
Input port for reference clock signals, used to receive the 8
kHz clock signals from the GCUa board
RJ45
TESTOUT
Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are used for
testing.
SMB male
connector
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board
The technical specifications of the SCUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
Table 6-80 describes the technical specifications of the SCUb board.
Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the SCUb board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
80 W
Weight
1.46 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Switching capacity
240 Gbit/s
6.23 TNUa Board
TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or two
TNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.23.1 Functions of the TNUa Board
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-93
201/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS
services of the entire system.
6.23.2 Panel of the TNUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.
6.23.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.23.4 Ports on the TNUa Board
There are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.
6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board
The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
6.23.1 Functions of the TNUa Board
The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS
services of the entire system.
The TNUa board performs the following functions:
l
Provides 128K x 128K time slots TDM switching
l
Allocates the TDM network resources
6.23.2 Panel of the TNUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.
shows the panel of the TNUa board.
Figure 6-29
6-94
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
202/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-29 Panel of the TNUa board
6.23.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-81 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.
Table 6-81 LEDs on the TNUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply,
but the board is faulty.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-95
203/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
Color
ALM
Red
ACT
Green
Status
Description
OFF
There is no power
supply, or the board is
faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
6.23.4 Ports on the TNUa Board
There are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.
Table 6-82 describes the ports on the TNUa board.
Table 6-82 Ports on the TNUa board
Port
Function
Connector Type
TDM0 to TDM5
TDM high-speed serial ports,
DB14
used to connect the TNUa
boards in different subracks
NOTE
The BSC6900 supports the inter-TNUa connections between the MPS and the EPS. It also supports the
inter-TNUa connections between the TCSs.
6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board
The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
Table 6-83 describes the technical specifications of the TNUa board.
Table 6-83 Technical specifications of the TNUa board
6-96
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/
standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
204/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Power consumption
31.20 W
Weight
1.00 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
6.24 XPUa Board
XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten
XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.24.1
of thesoftware,
XPUa Board
LoadedFunctions
with different
the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa
board and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.
6.24.2 Panel of the XPUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.
6.24.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.24.4 Ports on the XPUa Board
There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.
6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board
The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
6.24.1 Functions of the XPUa Board
Loaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa
board
and non-main
controlcontrol
XPUa plane
board.resources,
The main and
control
XPUa board
is usedintothe
manage
the
GSM user
plane resources,
transmission
resources
system
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-97
205/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.
Main Control XPUa Board
The main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l
Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l
Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l
Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSIRNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l
Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control XPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l
Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l
Processing transport layer signaling
l
Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l
Processing RFN signaling
Non-Main Control XPUa Board
The non-main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
The four subsystems of the non-main control XPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l
Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l
l
Processing transport layer signaling
Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l
Processing RFN signaling
6.24.2 Panel of the XPUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.
Figure 6-30 shows the panel of the XPUa board.
6-98
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
206/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Figure 6-30 Panel of the XPUa board
6.24.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-84 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.
Table 6-84 LEDs on the XPUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-99
207/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Green
Status
Description
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data transmission over
Blinking
the Ethernet port.
There is data transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Ethernet port)
6.24.4 Ports on the XPUa Board
There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.
Table 6-85 describes the ports on the XPUa board.
Table 6-85 Ports on the XPUa board
Port
Function
Connector Type
10/100/1000BASE-T0 to
10/100/1000BASE-T3
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet
ports
RJ45
6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board
The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-86 describes the technical specifications of the XPUa board.
Table 6-86 Technical specifications of the XPUa board
6-100
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
208/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Item
Specification
Power consumption
75.40 W
Weight
1.60 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Processing capability of the main control
XPUa board
Supporting 270 TRXs, 270 cells, 270 BTSs, and
492,000 Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCAs)
Processing capability of the non-main
Supporting 360 TRXs, 360 cells, 360 BTSs, and
control XPUa board
656,000 BHCAs
NOTE
The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be
calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.
6.25 XPUb Board
XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten
XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE
l
If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l
If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.
6.25.1 Functions of the XPUb Board
Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb
board
and non-main
controlcontrol
XPUb plane
board.resources,
The main and
control
XPUb board
is usedintothe
manage
the
GSM user
plane resources,
transmission
resources
system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.
6.25.2 Panel of the XPUb Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.
6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.25.4
Ports
on10/100/1000BASE-T
the XPUb Board
There are
four
ports on the XPUb board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-101
209/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board
The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
6.25.1 Functions of the XPUb Board
Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb
board and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.
Main Control XPUb Board
The main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l
Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l
Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l
Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSIRNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l
Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control XPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l
Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l
Processing transport layer signaling
l
Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l
Processing RFN signaling
Non-Main Control XPUb Board
The non-main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
The eight subsystems of the non-main control XPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
6-102
l
Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l
Processing transport layer signaling
l
Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l
Processing RFN signaling
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
210/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
6.25.2 Panel of the XPUb Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.
Figure 6-31 shows the panel of the XPUb board.
Figure 6-31 Panel of the XPUb board
6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-87 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.
Table 6-87 LEDs on the XPUb board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-103
211/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Orange
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data transmission over
the Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission over the
Ethernet port.
6.25.4 Ports on the XPUb Board
There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board.
Table 6-88 describes the ports on the XPUb board.
Table 6-88 Ports on the XPUb board
Port
Function
Connector Type
10/100/1000BASE-T0 to
10/100/1000BASE-T3
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet
ports
RJ45
6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board
The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-89 describes the technical specifications of the XPUb board.
6-104
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
212/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6 Boards
Table 6-89 Technical specifications of the XPUb board
Item
Specification
Dimensions
366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply
Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.
The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Power consumption
52.3 W
Weight
1.2 kg
Operating temperature (long-term)
0°C to 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term)
-5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term)
5% to 95%
Processing capability of the main control
XPUb board
Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and
1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs
Processing capability of the non-main
control XPUb board
Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and
1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs
NOTE
The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be
calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.
6.26 WOPB Board
WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power
distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.
6.26.1 Functions of the WOPB Board
The WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.
6.26.1 Functions of the WOPB Board
The WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.
The WOPB board performs the following functions:
l
Suppresses differential mode power surge
l
Suppresses common mode power surge
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
6-105
213/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
214/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
7
Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.
7.1 Power Cables
The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internal
power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
7.2 PGND Cables
The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
7.3 Optical Cable
The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The
active/standby
twisted
pair
is a type
of E1/T1
cable.
It is optional.
Thecable
number
of 120-ohm120-ohm
twisted pair
cables
tocable
be installed
depends
on site
requirements.
This
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-1
215/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.
7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable
The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are
located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.9 BITS Clock Cable
The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock
signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion
cables.
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable
The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock signals
cables to
be installed
depends
onthe
theMPS
site requirements.
This cable
the 8 kHz
clock
from
the GCUa
board in
to the SCUa board
in thetransmits
EPS.
7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable
The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa board.
7.12 Straight-Through Cable
The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of
straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.
7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable
The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable
The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
7.17 OMU serial port cable
The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable
The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.
7.19 SFP+ High-Speed Cable
7-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
216/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-3
217/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
7.1 Power Cables
The
power
cables
mandatory
andthe
are-48
of two
categories:
powerpower
cablescables.
and internal
power
cables.
Theare
power
cables are
V power
cables external
and the RTN
The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distribution
box at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal
power cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal
power cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.
Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box
Table 7-1 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the highpower power distribution box. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the internal power cables when
the BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box.
Table 7-1 External power cables
Name
Color
CrossSectional
Area
mm2
Externa
l -48 V
Blue
25/35
power
cable
Externa
l RTN
power
cable
Black
25/35
Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1
Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2
Quantity
2-hole JG
terminal/-48 V
OT
terminal/-48 V
Four per cabinet
DC power
input port on
the
distribution box
DCthe
output
on
PDFport
2-hole JG
terminal/-48 V
DC input port on
the power
distribution box
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the PDF
Four per cabinet
Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)
Name
Color
CrossSectional
Area
mm2
Internal
-48 V
DC
power
cable
Blue
10
Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1
Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2
Quantity
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the subrack
Two per subrack
box
7-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
218/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Name
Color
CrossSectional
Area
mm2
Internal
RTN
power
cable
Black
10
Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1
Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2
Quantity
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the subrack
Two per subrack
Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1
Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2
Quantity
Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)
Name
Color
CrossSectional
Area
mm2
Internal
-48 V
DC
power
cable
Blue
2
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box
D-type
connector/
Power input
port on the
independent
fan subrack
Two per independent
fan subrack
Internal
RTN
power
cable
Black
2
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box
D-type
connector/
Power input
port on the
independent
fan subrack
Two per independent
fan subrack
Figure 7-1 shows the external power cable.
Figure 7-1 External power cable
(1) OT terminal
(2) 2-hole JG terminal
Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for subracks.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-5
219/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks
Figure 7-3 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack
Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box
Table 7-4 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the
common power distribution box. Table 7-5 describes the internal power cables when the
BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box.
Table 7-4 External power cables
Name
Color
CrossSectional
Area
mm2
Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2
Quantity
Externa
l -48 V
power
cable
Blue
25/35
Cord end
terminal/-48 V
DC input port on
the power
distribution box
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the PDF
Four per cabinet
Externa
Black
25/35
Cord end
OT
Four per cabinet
terminal/-48
DC
input portVon
the power
distribution box
terminal/-48
V
DC
output port
on the PDF
l RTN
power
cable
7-6
Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
220/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Table 7-5 Internal power cables
Name
Color
CrossSectional
Area
mm2
Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1
Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2
Quantity
Internal
-48 V
DC
power
cable
Blue
8
Cord end
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the subrack
Two per subrack
Internal
RTN
power
Black
8
Cord end
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
Two per subrack
on the power
distribution
box
on the subrack
cable
The internal power cable and the external power cable have the same appearance when the
BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Figure 7-4 shows the external/
internal power cable.
Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable
X1: Cord end terminal
X2: OT terminal
7.2 PGND Cables
The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are
combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent
cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.
Table 7-6 describes the PGND cables.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-7
221/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Table 7-6 PGND cables
Cable
Name
Color
CrossSectional
Area
mm2
External
PGND
cable
Green and
yellow
25/35
Connect
or Type
1/
Installati
on
Position
1
Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2
Quantity
OT
terminal/
Groundin
g bolt at
the top
rear of
each
OT terminal/
PGND output
port on the PDF
One per
cabinet
cabinet
Intercabinet
PGND
cable
Green and
yellow
6
OT
terminal/
PGND
busbar of
each
cabinet
OT terminal/
PGND busbar of
each cabinet
Three
between
every two
adjacent
cabinets
PGND
cable for
the power
Green and
yellow
6
OT
terminal/
PGND
OT terminal/Port
for PGND cable
on the power
One per
power
distribution
busbar
each of
cabinet
distribution box
box
distributio
n box
7-8
PGND
cable for
the subrack
Green and
yellow
6
OT
terminal/
PGND
busbar of
each
cabinet
OT terminal/Port
for the PGND
cable on the
subrack
Two per
subrack
PGND
cable for
the cabinet
door
Green and
yellow
6
OT
terminal/
Groundin
g bolt on
the base
OT terminal/
Grounding bolt
on the cabinet
door
Eight per
cabinet
PGND
cable for
the
independe
nt fan
subrack
Green and
yellow
6
OT
terminal/
PGND
busbar of
each
cabinet
OT terminal/
Grounding point
of the
independent fan
subrack
One per
independent
fan subrack
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
222/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for
the BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6
shows the other PGND cables.
Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack
Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables
7.3 Optical Cable
The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
Classification of the Optical Cable
According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be
classified into the following types:
l
LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l
LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l
LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
NOTE
l
In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical
interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site
requirements.
l
The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to the
ODF or other NEs or connects the optical interface boards.
l
In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with
temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected
to the RX port.
CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical
signals cannot be received or transmitted.
BSC6900 Optical Cables
Table 7-7 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-9
223/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables
Optical Cable Type
Appearance
LC/PC-LC/PC singlemode/multi-mode
LC/PC-FC/PC singlemode/multi-mode
LC/PC-SC/PC singlemode/multi-mode
Installation
The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board
in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC
connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of the
optical cable.
Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
EIUa/PEUa
board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
7-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
224/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial
cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the
16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Appearance
Figure 7-8 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable
(1) DB44 connector
(2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)
(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector
The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector
to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Pin Assignment
The outer shielding layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal
case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors
for the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
W1
Signal
38
Ring
23
Tip
37
Ring
22
Tip
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Remarks
Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier
1
2
R1
R2
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
W2
Signal
15
Ring
30
Tip
14
Ring
29
Tip
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Remarks
Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier
1
T1
2
T2
7-11
225/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
W1
Remarks
Signal
Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier
36
Ring
3
21
Tip
35
Ring
20
Tip
34
Ring
19
Tip
33
Ring
18
Tip
32
Ring
17
Tip
31
Ring
16
Tip
4
R3
R4
5
R5
6
R6
7
8
R7
R8
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
W2
Remarks
Signal
Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier
13
Ring
3
T3
28
Tip
12
Ring
4
T4
27
Tip
11
Ring
5
T5
26
Tip
10
Ring
6
T6
25
Tip
9
Ring
7
T7
24
Tip
8
Ring
8
T8
7
Tip
Table 7-9 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal
Bearer
Ring
Shielding layer of micro coaxial cables
Tip
Core of micro coaxial cables
Installation
One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUa
board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects
signals. the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
7-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
226/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Appearance
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohm
coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All
of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Figure 7-9 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable
(1) DB44 connector
(2) Metal case of the DB44 connector
(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)
(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need
to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-10 and Table 7-12 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4
X1
W3
Pin of
DB44
Signal
Connec
tor
Cable
Identifi
er
38
Ring
23
Tip
37
Ring
22
Tip
36
Ring
21
Tip
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Micro
Coaxial
Remark
s
1
2
3
X1
W4
Pin of
DB44
Signal
Connec
tor
R1
R2
R3
Micro
Coaxial
Remark
s
Cable
Identifi
er
15
Ring
30
Tip
14
Ring
29
Tip
13
Ring
28
Tip
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
1
T1
2
T2
3
T3
7-13
227/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
X1
W3
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
Signal
Micro
Coaxial
Cable
Identifi
er
35
Ring
4
20
Tip
34
Ring
19
Tip
33
Ring
18
Tip
32
Ring
17
Tip
31
Ring
16
Tip
5
Remark
s
X1
W4
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
Signal
Micro
Coaxial
Cable
Identifi
er
R4
12
Ring
4
T4
27
Tip
11
Ring
5
T5
26
Tip
10
Ring
6
T6
25
Tip
9
Ring
7
T7
24
Tip
8
Ring
8
T8
7
Tip
R5
6
R6
7
R7
8
R8
Remark
s
NOTE
In Table 7-10, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.
Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.
Table 7-11 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-10.
Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal
Bearer
Ring
Shielding layer of coaxial cables
Tip
Core of coaxial cables
Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2
W2
7-14
W1
Pin of X1
Connector
Pin of X2
Connector
Remarks
Pin of X1
Connector
Pin of X2
Connector
Remarks
38
38
PAIR
15
15
PAIR
23
23
30
30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
228/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
W2
W1
Pin of X1
Connector
Pin of X2
Connector
Remarks
Pin of X1
Connector
Pin of X2
Connector
Remarks
37
37
PAIR
14
14
PAIR
22
22
29
29
36
36
13
13
21
21
28
28
35
35
12
12
20
20
27
27
34
34
11
11
19
19
26
26
33
33
10
10
18
18
25
25
32
32
9
9
17
17
24
24
31
31
8
8
16
16
7
7
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
NOTE
In Table 7-12, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer
of the twisted pair cable.
Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connected
to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial
cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through
transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be
connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-10 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-15
229/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
230/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Pin Assignment
The outer shielding layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the
metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-13 describes the pin assignment of the DB44
connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
W1
Color
Signal
120Ohm
Twisted
Pair
Cable
Identifie
r
38
Ring/R-
R1
23
Tip/R+
37
Ring/R-
22
Tip/R+
36
Ring/R-
21
Tip/R+
35
Ring/R-
20
Tip/R+
34
Ring/R-
19
Tip/R+
33
Ring/R-
18
Tip/R+
32
Ring/R-
17
Tip/R+
31
Ring/R-
16
Tip/R+
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
W2
Color
Signal
120Ohm
Twisted
Pair
Cable
Identifie
r
Blue
15
Ring/T-
T1
White
30
Tip/T+
Orange
14
Ring/T-
White
29
Tip/T+
Green
13
Ring/T-
White
28
Tip/T+
Brown
12
Ring/T-
White
27
Tip/T+
Grey
11
Ring/T-
White
26
Tip/T+
Blue
10
Ring/T-
Red
25
Tip/T+
Orange
9
Ring/T-
Red
24
Tip/T+
Green
8
Ring/T-
Red
7
Tip/T+
Blue
White
T2
Orange
White
T3
Green
White
T4
Brown
White
T5
Grey
White
T6
Blue
Red
T7
Orange
Red
T8
Green
Red
Table 7-14 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-13.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-17
231/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal
Bearer
Ring/R-
One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals
Tip/R+
The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals
Ring/T-
One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals
Tip/T+
The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/
T1 signals
Installation
One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/
PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.
Appearance
Figure 7-12 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable
(1) DB44 connector
(2) Metal case of the DB44 connector
(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer
of the cable)
(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)
7-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
232/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You
need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-15 and Table 7-17 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4
X1
W3
Color
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
Signal
Twiste
d Pair
Cable
Identifi
er
38
Ring/R-
R1
23
Tip/R+
37
Ring/R-
22
Tip/R+
36
Ring/R-
21
Tip/R+
35
Ring/R-
20
Tip/R+
34
Ring/T-
19
Tip/T+
33
Ring/T-
18
Tip/T+
32
Ring/T-
17
Tip/T+
31
Ring/T-
16
Tip/T+
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
X1
W4
Color
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor
Signal
Twiste
d Pair
Cable
Identifi
er
Blue
15
Ring/R-
T1
White
30
Tip/R+
Orange
14
Ring/R-
White
29
Tip/R+
Green
13
Ring/R-
White
28
Tip/R+
Brown
12
Ring/R-
White
27
Tip/R+
Grey
11
Ring/T-
White
26
Tip/T+
Blue
10
Ring/T-
Red
25
Tip/T+
Orange
9
Ring/T-
Red
24
Tip/T+
Green
8
Ring/T-
Red
7
Tip/T+
Blue
White
T2
Orange
White
T3
Green
White
T4
Brown
White
T5
Grey
White
T6
Blue
Red
T7
Orange
Red
T8
Green
Red
NOTE
In Table 7-15, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.
Table 7-16 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-15.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-19
233/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal
Bearer
Ring/R-
One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
to the BSC6900
Tip/R+
The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals to the BSC6900
Ring/T-
One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
from the BSC6900
Tip/T+
The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals from the BSC6900
Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2
Twisted Pair Cable W2
7-20
Pin of X1
Connector
Pin of X2
Connector
38
38
23
23
37
37
22
36
22
36
21
21
35
35
20
20
34
34
19
19
33
33
18
18
32
32
17
17
31
31
16
16
Remarks
Twisted Pair Cable W1
Remarks
Pin of X1
Connector
Pin of X2
Connector
15
15
30
30
PAIR
14
14
PAIR
PAIR
29
13
29
13
PAIR
28
28
12
12
27
27
11
11
26
26
10
10
25
25
9
9
24
24
8
8
7
7
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
PAIR
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
234/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
NOTE
In Table 7-17, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer
of the twisted pair cable.
Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are
connected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby
120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another
NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair
cable can also be connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-13 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables
7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable
The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are
located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
Appearance
Figure 7-14 shows the inter-TNUa cable.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-21
235/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-14 Inter-TNUa cable
(1) DB14
(2) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)
(3) Main label (identifying the code, version, and
manufacturer of the cable)
Installation
The two DB14 connectors at one end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active and
standby TNUa boards in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the interTNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in another subrack.
Figure 7-15 shows the installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables.
7-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
236/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-15 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables
7.9 BITS Clock Cable
The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock
signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion
cables.
Appearance
Figure 7-16 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-23
237/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-16 75-ohm coaxial clock cable
(1) SMB connector
(2) Label
Figure 7-17 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.
Figure 7-17 120-ohm clock conversion cable
(1) SMB connector
2Label
NOTE
The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is
used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the
connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.
Installation
One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.
Figure 7-18 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.
7-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
238/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable
The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.
NOTE
The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.
Appearance
Figure 7-19 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-25
239/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-19 Y-shaped clock cable
(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)
(2) RJ45 connector
Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa board in
the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the active and
standby GCUa boards in the MPS.
Figure 7-20 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.
Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables
7-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
240/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable
The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa board.
NOTE
When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent
to the GCUa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is not
required.
Appearance
Figure 7-21 shows the line clock signal cable.
Figure 7-21 Line clock signal cable
(1) SMB connector
Installation
One end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface
board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board.
7.12 Straight-Through Cable
The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of
straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.
Appearance
Figure 7-22 shows the shielded straight-through cable.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-27
241/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-22 Shielded straight-through cable
NOTE
X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.
Figure 7-23 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.
Figure 7-23 Unshielded straight-through cable
NOTE
X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.
Pin Assignment
Table 7-18 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straightthrough cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.
7-28
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
242/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable
X1 End
Wire Color
X2 End
Wire Color
X1-1
White and orange
X2-1
White and orange
X1-2
Orange
X2-2
Orange
X1-3
White and green
X2-3
White and green
X1-4
Blue
X2-4
Blue
X1-5
White and blue
X2-5
White and blue
X1-6
Green
X2-6
Green
X1-7
White and brown
X2-7
White and brown
X1-8
Brown
X2-8
Brown
Installation
l
When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different
subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards
that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the
SCUa boards in different subracks
l
When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa/OMUc board to
other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1
on the OMUa/OMUc board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is
connected to the Ethernet port on the other devices.
l
When
thethe
shielded
straight-through
cable
used
to connect
the FG2a/FG2c
board
other
devices,
RJ45 connector
at one end
of is
the
cable
is connected
to an Ethernet
porttoon
the
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-29
243/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
FG2a/FG2c board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
Ethernet port on the other devices.
l
When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the XPUa/XPUb board to the
CBC, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the
XPUa/XPUb board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to
an Ethernet port on the CBC.
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan
Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.
Appearance
Figure 7-25 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-25 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one end
and a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-19 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
7-30
Start
End
Description
Remarks
X1.1
X2.7
Tx+
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.6
Tx-
X1.3
X2.3
Rx+
X1.4
X2.2
Rx-
X1.5
X2.5
GND
-
X1.SHELL
X2.SHELL
-
X1.SHELL is
connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shielding layer.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Twisted pair
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
244/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Table 7-20 describes the signals listed in Table 7-19.
Table 7-20 Signals
Signal
Signal Description
Tx+
Positive phase signal transmitted
Tx-
Negative phase signal transmitted
Rx+
Positive phase signal received
Rx-
Negative phase signal received
Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at
the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.
NOTE
When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to
top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the
bottom subrack in the cabinet.
7.14 AlarmThe
Box
Signal Cable
alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type
must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal
cable with the DB9 connector as an example.
Figure 7-26 shows an alarm box signal cable.
Figure 7-26 Alarm box signal cable
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-31
245/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 7-21 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.
Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable
RJ45
DB9
3
5
5
2
6
3
Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port
on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
serial port on the LMT.
Figure 7-27 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.
Figure 7-27 Connection of the alarm box signal cable
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution
Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
Appearance
Figure 7-28 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
7-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
246/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Figure 7-28 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and
a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-22 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
Start
End
Description
Remarks
X1.1
X2.3
Tx+
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Tx-
X1.3
X2.7
Rx+
X1.4
X2.6
Rx-
X1.5
X2.5
RTN
-
X1.SHELL
X2.SHELL
-
X1.SHELL is
connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shielding layer.
Twisted pair
Table 7-23 describes the signals listed in Table 7-22.
Table 7-23 Signals
Signal
Signal Description
Tx+
Positive phase signal transmitted
Tx-
Negative phase signal transmitted
Rx+
Positive phase signal received
Rx-
Negative phase signal received
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-33
247/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is
connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the
other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-29 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.
Figure 7-29 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable
The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
Appearance
Figure 7-30 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.
Figure 7-30 GPS signal transmission cable
7-34
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
248/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
X1: SMA male connector
X2: N-type female connector
X3: N-type male connector
Installation
Connect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector of
a 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmission
cable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected
to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end of
the cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.
7.17 OMU serial port cable
The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
Appearance
Figure 7-31 shows the OMU serial port cable.
Figure 7-31 OMU serial port cable
Pin Assignment
Both ends of the OMU serial port cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-24 lists the
pins of the OMU serial port cable.
Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial port cable
DB9
DB9
2
3
3
2
5
5
Installation Position
One end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The
other
end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance
terminal.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-35
249/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
NOTE
The OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.
7.18 EMU RS485
Communication Cable
The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.
Appearance
Figure 7-32 shows the RS485 communication cable.
Figure 7-32 RS485 communication cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-25 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.
Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable
RJ45
DB9
4
2
1
3
5
6
2
7
Installation
The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9
female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end
of the cable is connected to the J2 port on a high-capacity power distribution box or the COM1
port on a common power distribution box.
NOTE
One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal
cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is
recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not
sufficient.
7-36
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
250/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7 Cables
7.19 SFP+ High-Speed Cable
The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.
Appearance
Figure 7-33 shows the SFP+ high-speed cable.
Figure 7-33 SFP+ high-speed cable
Installation
The two connectors at the two ends of the SFP+ high-speed cable are connected to the 10G
Ethernet ports on the SCUb boards that are located in different subracks.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
7-37
251/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
252/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
8
LEDs on the Boards
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.9 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.10 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.11 LEDs on the GOUc Board
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-1
253/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
8.12 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
8.13 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.14 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
8.15 LEDs on the OMUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
8.16 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
8.17 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.18 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.19 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.20 LEDs on the SCUb Board
AmongLINK
all theand
LEDs
onindicate
the SCUb
N, ALM,
and ACT indicate
the status
the 10G
SCUb
board,
ACT
theboard,
statusRU
of each
10M/100M/1000M
Ethernet
port,ofand
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
8.21 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: R UN, ALM, and ACT.
8.22 LEDs on the XPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.23 LEDs on the XPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
254/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.
Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board in active mode.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.
LEDs on the DPUc board
Table 8-2
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-3
255/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
Color
Status
Description
ALM
Red
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ACT
Green
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.
Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF
for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and
OFF for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.
Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board
8-4
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
256/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.
8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board.
Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUg board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF
for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and
OFF for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-5
257/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.
Table 8-6 LEDs on the EIUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2a board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
ALM
ACT
8-6
Red
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
258/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
Color
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
Status
Description
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.
Table 8-8 LEDs on the FG2c board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
ALM
ACT
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Red
Green
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-7
259/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
Color
Status
Description
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Orange
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
8.9 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 8-9 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
OFF
board is faulty.
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
8.10 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUa board
8-8
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
260/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
8.11 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.
Table 8-11 LEDs on the GOUc board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There
is no power
supply,
or
the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
ALM
ACT
LINK (optical
port LED)
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Red
Green
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-9
261/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
ACT (optical
port LED)
Color
Green
Status
Description
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
8.12 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Table 8-12 LEDs on the MDMC board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The MDMC board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The MDMC board is not working or it
does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.
ALM
Red
OFF
The power supply to the MDMC board
is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON
The power distribution box is faulty.
During the self-check of the MDMC
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.
8.13 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.
8-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
262/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
Table 8-13 LEDs on the OIUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF
The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.
ALM
ACT
LOS
Red
Green
Green
8.14 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 8-14 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
ALM
ACT
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Red
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-11
263/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
OFFLINE
HD
Color
Blue
Green
Status
Description
OFF
The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.
ON
The board can be removed.
OFF
The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being switched over to
the other working mode.
OFF
There is no read or write operation
on the hard disk.
Blinking
The hard disk is being read or
written.
8.15 LEDs on the OMUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.
Table 8-15 LEDs on the OMUc board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode, or the
board is disconnected.
ON
The board can be removed.
OFF
The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is being switched over to
the other working mode.
ALM
ACT
OFL
8-12
Red
Green
Blue
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
264/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
Color
Status
Description
HDD
Green
OFF
There is no read or write operation
on the hard disk.
Blinking
The hard disk is being read or
written.
8.16 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 8-16 LEDs on the PAMU board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for
1s
The PAMU board is functional and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s
The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.
OFF
The
power supply
to the PAMU
board
is
abnormal
or the power
distribution
box does not work properly.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON
The power distribution box is faulty.
During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.
ALM
Red
8.17 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.
Table 8-17 LEDs on the PEUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-13
265/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
8.18 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.
Table 8-18 LEDs on the POUc board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The STM-1 port does not receive
signals properly.
OFF
The STM-1 port receives signals
properly.
ALM
ACT
LOS
8-14
Red
Green
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
266/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
267/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
Table 8-20 LEDs on the SCUb board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for
0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
ON
There is power supply, but
the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply,
or the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission
over the Ethernet port.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
10G LINK
Green
8.21 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-21 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.
Table 8-21 LEDs on the TNUa board
8-16
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading
state.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
268/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
Color
ALM
Red
ACT
Green
Status
Description
ON
There is power supply,
but the board is faulty.
OFF
There is no power
supply, or the board is
faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active
mode.
OFF
The board is in standby
mode.
8.22 LEDs on the XPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-22 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.
Table 8-22 LEDs on the XPUa board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
ALM
ACT
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Red
Green
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
8-17
269/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8 LEDs on the Boards
LED
Color
Status
Description
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
Green
OFF
There is no data transmission over
the Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission over the
Ethernet port.
8.23 LEDs on the XPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-23 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.
Table 8-23 LEDs on the XPUb board
LED
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF
for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON
There is power supply, but the board
is faulty.
OFF
There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
OFF
There is no alarm.
ON or blinking
There is a fault alarm.
ON
The board is in active mode.
OFF
The board is in standby mode.
ON
The link is well connected.
OFF
The link is disconnected.
OFF
There is no data transmission over
the Ethernet port.
Blinking
There is data transmission over the
Ethernet port.
ALM
ACT
LINK (at the
Ethernet port)
ACT (at the
Ethernet port)
8-18
Red
Green
Green
Orange
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
270/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
9
DIP Switches on Components
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
9-1
271/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
Location of the DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.
Appearance
Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack
Description about the DIP Switch
The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.
9-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
272/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
Table 9-1 Description about the bits
Bit
Description
1-5
Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.
6
Odd parity check bit
7
Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON
8 (the most significant
bit)
Reserved
Principle of the DIP Switch Setting
As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1.
Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2.
Set bit 7 to ON.
3.
Note that the setting of bit 8 remains unchanged.
4.
Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.
l
If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l
If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.
Table 9-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch
Subr
ack
No.
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
2
3
4
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Setting of the
DIP Switch
9-3
273/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
Subr
ack
No.
5
Bit
Setting of the
DIP Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
ON
OF
F
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
OFF
ON
OF
F
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
(1) Sub-board
9-4
(2) Bottom plate
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
274/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
NOTE
l
When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this
case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l
When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.
l
In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to
and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.
Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
DIP Switch
Bit
Description
Setting for 75ohm Coaxial
Cable
Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable
S1
8
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 0-7
ON
OFF
7
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 8-15
ON
OFF
6
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
16-23
ON
OFF
5
Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
24-31
ON
OFF
1-4
Reserved
S3
1-8
TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 0-7
ON
OFF
S4
1-8
TX ground
ON
OFF
switch of E1s/
T1s 8-15
S5
1-8
TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 16-23
ON
OFF
S6
1-8
TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 24-31
ON
OFF
Table 9-4 describes the different DIP switches.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
9-5
275/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches
DIP Switch
Description
E1/T1 impedance selection switch
Used to select the logical transmission mode of the
board and to notify the software of the current
transmission mode
E1/T1 TX ground switch
Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end
of the E1/T1 signals
NOTE
l
The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.
l
The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches
on the standby board.
l
The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.
Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board
With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.
To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 9-5.
Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board
9-6
Address
Bit
Setting of DIP Bit
Description
0
1 (the most significant
bit)
ON
0
2
ON
0
3
ON
0
4 (the least significant
bit)
ON
0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
276/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 9-5.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board
With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
9-6.
Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board
Address
Bit
Setting of DIP Bit
Description
0
1 (the most significant
bit)
ON
0
2
ON
0
3
ON
0
4 (the least significant
bit)
ON
0
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-6.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
9-7
277/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board
(1) Sub-board
9-8
(2) Bottom plate
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
278/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
NOTE
l
All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l
You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l
If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-7 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.
Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIP
Switc
h
Bit
Description
Setting of DIP
Switch
Meaning
S2
1-8
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
S4
S6
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
1-8
1-8
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
9-9
279/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
DIP
Switc
h
S8
Bit
1-8
S10
1-2
Description
TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15
DIP switch for setting the
working mode,
consisting of two bits
Setting of DIP
Switch
Meaning
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
ON
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
OFF
Setting the
working mode to
other modes
(ON, ON)
Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode
(OFF, ON)
Setting the
working mode to
E1 balanced
mode
(ON, OFF)
Setting the
working mode to
T1 mode
(OFF, OFF)
Setting the
working mode to
J1 mode
NOTE
All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
9-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
280/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch
Bit
Setting
Switch of DIP
Description
SW1
1 (the least significant
bit)
OFF
1
2
ON
0
3
ON
0
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON
0
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-9. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
9-11
281/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch
Bit
Setting of DIP
Switch
Description
SW1
1 (the least significant
bit)
ON
0
2
ON
0
3
OFF
1
4 (the most significant
bit)
ON
0
NOTE
The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-8 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board
To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
9-12
Pin
Numb
er
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-10
11-12
13-14
15-16
Connec
ted to
jumper
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
Issue Draft A (2011-01-31)
282/283
8/13/2019
BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_Draft a)(PDF)-En
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9 DIP Switches on Components
Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900-gsm-hardware-descriptionv900r013c00draft-apdf-en
283/283